Home

SES-2000 User's Guide

Contents

1. It is possible to transmit even one cycle of the difference frequency signal and therefore to gain an excellent resolution as well as penetration Due to the narrow beam and the high frequency bandwidth the seabed echoes from nonlinear echo sounders have a steeper slope than echoes from linear ones These steeper signals are better to detect at low signal to noise ratios especially when using differentiating analysis or edge detection algorithms see also section 9 6 2 on page 193 Near field length The parametric sound field is formed in the so called interaction area in front of the transducer The sound pressure of the dif ference frequency along the acoustic axis grows continuously up to the length of the diffraction zone and after that sinks conti nuously There are no local extremes in the Fresnel zone for the difference frequency The smaller the ratio between primary and secondary frequency the higher the sound pressure of the difference frequency gets The near field length of a transducer depends on the transducer size related to the trans mitted frequency Since the transducer of a nonlinear system is small and the transmitted frequencies are high the near field length is short compared to linear echo sounders with the same half power beam widt
2. noeenneneneennnneeeennneeeere nenne 11 2 2 Installation and Basic Configuration of the SESWIN Software ccccsseseeeeeeees 14 2 3 Operating the SESW IN SORWI E ricnienaie a a a E 15 2 4 Checklist for System Setup Survey Start cccccseeeeeceseeeeeeaeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaes 19 3 SES 2000 Hardware System Installation ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 3l OES 2000 SYSIEM OVEIVICW naniaiiannna innn a aa 21 32 GES9 2000 COMP ACH iek aE 22 3o OOO OI iere a a a aiid eeentcen eaten 23 34 OES 2000 Standard seriye a a wolia eo eee ends 24 30 SEC OOO CONTA eene a T a a A a 25 BOs E9 ZOO OO CCI nsan N ete eee eae att 27 Oa SES 2000 ROV irran ea a e i raeeeetal 30 3 8 SES2000 SIDESCAN EXEnSiON sysco anr E R E E 32 3 9 SES 2000 xxx AR Advanced Receiver Array ccccccecccsscccceseeceeceseeesseseeseeeenaes 33 3 10 Transducer Handling and Installation ccccccccccseceesseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeesaes 34 ST Mamm MStalatio Manaa a a 38 3 12 SES 2000 Front Panel Connectors and Switches ccccseccecseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeees 39 Ooo SES 2000 Red PANE aaria ERA cadet tes eeiceaddaanne ed 43 3 14 Installing additonal Sensors x s ictee cess cei dhs ne EN 44 3 15 SES 2000 power supply requirements cccccccssseeeecseseeceseeseeeseeeeesseaeseesesaaes 45 4 Installing the SESWIN System Software ccccscesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 47 4 1 Hstaling SE SWIN SOMWANC ruisen E A a
3. 37 38 twisted pairs 18 AWG Pins 37 38 sensor option Pins 13 14 Transuder Plugged safety circiut Pins 19 20 GND Pin 39 shield Connectors at the pressure vessel Description Qty Manufacturer Part number Remarks Transducer connector 1 Burton 6616 3239 0003 SS female socket 39 pins Power connector trigger serial 1 Burton 5506 2008 0003 SS male socket interface 8 pins Network and leak sensor 1 Burton 5506 2013 0003 SS male socket 13 connector data connector pins Service connector 1 Burton 5506 2021 0003 SS male socket 21 pins 14 13 12 41 10 O0O000 0 18 17 16 15 O00 0 21 20 m19 OOO 55xx 2008 55xx 2013 55xx 2021 66xx 3239 8 18 AWG 13 18 AWG 21 18 AWG 39 18 AWG Innomar Technologie GmbH 222 SES 2000 User s Guide Dummy Plugs pressure proof Description Qty Manufacturer Part number Remarks Dummy plug for transducer 1 Burton 6601 3239 0000 A connector at pressure vessel Dummy plug for transducer 1 Burton 5501 3239 0000 A connector at transducer Dummy plug for power connector 1 Burton 5501 2008 0000 A Dummy plug for data connector 1 Burton 5501 2013 0000 A Dummy plug for service 1 Burton 5501 2021 0000 A connector Dummy plugs should be used on all unused connectors if the system mounted on the ROV Connector caps are not suitable Connector Caps for Pressure Vessel and Transducer stainless steel Description Qty Manufacturer Part number Pressure cap for transducer 1 Burton 6
4. By shifting the phase of the signal from one transducer element to the other the resulting wave front is transmitted into a certain direction related to the transducer s surface The figure below shows the beam pattern of a line shaped transducer for three different steering angles Electronic beam steering results in e steered mainlobe maximum sound pressure directed not along the acoustical axis e increasing sidelobes and a decreasing mainlobe with increasing beam steering angles Innomar Technologie GmbH 186 SES 2000 User s Guide 9 4 Nonlinear Parametric Sub bottom Profilers 9 4 1 Nonlinear Sound Generation Nonlinear parametric sub bottom profilers use the parametric acoustical effect The trans mission of sound waves at high sound pressure results in nonlinearities at the sound propagation If two slightly different frequencies f and f so called primary frequencies f lt fz fo f 1 are transmitted at high sound pressures simultaneously the transmitted sound waves interact in the water There are new frequencies generated so called secondary frequencies e g the difference frequency of the transmitted primary waves Other frequencies are also generated which are not of interest in this context harmonics and sum of the primary frequencies as well as harmonics of the difference frequency The difference frequency F f f in the range of 2 7 kHz for the SES 2000 deep and 4 15 kHz for the other SES 2
5. Packet format XXAAAASMHHHHOMRRRRSMPPPP lt CR gt lt LF gt String example s000033 OC01U 9999 0046 lt CRe lt LEF gt Innomar Technologie GmbH 239 240 That means XX AAAA S MHHHH Q MRRRR MPPPP lt CR gt lt LF gt 3Ah Start of Package SOP horizontal acceleration vertical acceleration space character Heave status flag Roll Pitch carriage return line feed Format EM 3000 This binary format is supported by several motion sensors There are no space characters within the binary string The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings Packet format 0 to 9 81m s2 20 48 to 20 47m s SES 2000 User s Guide 3 83cm s 0 0625cm s2 20h 99 to 99m 1cm U settled condition u unsettled condition 90 to 90 0 01 90 to 90 0 01 So OD UR RR PP PP Hn ii eb HH String example binary hexadecimal values 90 90 BD EE C3 00 00 Q0 AD 239 That means SS Sensor Status 90h 9Ah 91h AOh 90h Header byte synchronisation byte RR Roll 2 bytes 180 PP Pitch 2 bytes 180 hh Heave 2 bytes 10m HH Heading 2 bytes 0 to 360 o k alignment error EM only reduced performance error 0 01 0 01 0 01m 0 01 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 241 Format Octans Std 1 iXsea France There are several NMEA 0183 compatible sentences sent containing He
6. This software is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally SES 2000 medium Upgrade The SES 2000 standard system can optionally be prepared for easy upgrading to a SES 2000 medium system at a later time If this option is purchased together with a SES 2000 standard system all the hardware is included to operate the electronic unit as SES 2000 medium main unit If later the water depth range and or the penetration capability have to be increased only the extension unit and a new transducer has to be purchased or rented to have a full SES 2000 medium system available Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 225 Water Protected Enclosure For the SES 2000 light standard medium and deep systems there are optionally enclosures suited for rough environments MIL standard available Water protection is given with closed cabinets during transport only Innomar Technologie GmbH 226 SES 2000 User s Guide blank page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 227 A 4 ISE Post Processing Software ISE is a post processing software tool for INNOMAR s SES 96 SES 2000 parametric sub bottom profilers There is a seperate manual for this software this chapter gives a short overview about possible data processing With ISE you can load the digitally stored data apply different processing algorithms and processing m
7. 8 7 1 The printer does not work Please check e ls the printer switched on e ls the printer cable connected to SES 2000 and the printer e Has SESWIN been set to the correct printer model Options System Interfaces Printer 8 7 2 No text is printed in the echo print margins The printer works but there are no coordinates and time information printed e Go to Options System Interfaces Printer and select the SIS settings you want to print e Switch on Print SIS Data in the checkbox e Check SIS data settings at Options System Interfaces SIS and check the incoming SIS data using the SIS window in the lower left corner of the SESWIN main screen Printer settings are described in section 5 11 6 on page 84 and section 7 9 on page 124 Innomar Technologie GmbH 178 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 8 Motion Sensor Problems The motion sensor should be placed as close as possible to the SES 2000 transducer If that is not possible make sure the lever arm correction of the motion sensor is set correctly For the motion sensor setup please refer to the motion sensor s manual The sensor has to be fixed firmly and must not vibrate For some motion sensors there are splash water proof housings available from INNOMAR that are designed to ease the motion sensors mounting close to the transducer Hints for installing and testing motion sensors are given in section 7 3 on page 113 Within the SESWIN sc
8. Ping Rate 17 55 pps y a K 3 w r it N 78 k 35h Foot Print 3dB 195 m Foot Print 6dB 27 m i 60 47 526 ka EJEA sis ms SIG map aa am ire aka r TRACK HI a TRACK HT TRACK HI Range 290m 320m LF Freq 15kHz LF Ee 3 Profile 72 File 8 of 12MB 15 01 2008 22 52 57 INT i PRN no paper Buk 0 Page 0 HD 9724 MB M5 from file 515 from file HCF from file ra time Program a ieee E HF Depth 300 28 m JU a Depth Threshold Ko Gain Range Process a 16 r 745 General aa Multi Frequency Mode Beam Steering Mode Allow High Pulse Rate Deep Sea Pulse Mode te ee eee ae r sis ms SIG MAP ee ee eS aS re sales a Range 300m 330m LF Freg 15kHz LF Pulses 3 Profile 2 File 3 of 12MB 15 01 2008 22 50 42 INT 4 PRN no paper Buf 0 Page 0 WB HD 95791MB B M5 from file 4B 515 from file 4B MCP from file AN re Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 129 7 10 4 How to set markers based on SES string value Fix or KP Markers Position Data Source Marker SIS Sting Number for Position Draw Track Marker way units OO SIS String Number fort Positions Draw Time Marker seconds SIS ID for Fis Marker Draw Fis Marker SIS ID for KP Marker Draw EP Marker SIS ID for optional 2nd Label Use Trigger Input for Event Marker W Exclude
9. Survey Start This checklist will assist you during system installation and preparing a survey It is not a replacement for reading the regarding chapters in this manual 2 4 1 Transducer Installation Transducer is mounted in stiff frame or supporting structure Transducer is decoupled from the ship s hull by rubber Transducer s active area is horizontally Transducer is located as far away from noise sources as possible Transducer is covered by water all times even at rough sea conditions An additional ground wire is going from the transducer s housing to the main unit The draught of the transducer distance from water surface to bottom of transducer is measured and noted OOO0000 0 2 4 2 Electronic Unit Installation O Electronic unit s is placed in a dry environment O Cooling slits in the front and rear panel are free and there is enough space for airflow O Main power supply is checked range 110 240 V AC 50 60 Hz If a small generator is used a ground wire should be connected to the generator going to the SES main unit Power cable s plugged in Transducer cable s plugged in If there are more than one electronic unit all units are connected by ground wires Additional sensors Motion sensor GPS are connected to the specified serial ports Since sometimes the Windows OS is confused if the sensors are connected while booting this step can be postponed O O O Additional ground wire from the transd
10. Winkel Tripel For a detailed description of these projections please refer to other sources Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 137 Available Ellipsoids MERIT a 6378137 0 tf 298 257 MERIT 1983 SGS85 a 6378136 0 f 298 257 Soviet Geodetic System 85 GRS80 a 6378137 0 rf 298 257222101 GRS 1980 IUGG 1980 IAU76 a 6378140 0 rf 298 257 IAU 1976 airy a 6377563 396 b 6356256 910 Airy 1830 mod_airy a 6377340 189 b 6356034 446 Modified Airy APL4 9 a 6378137 0 rf 298 25 Appl Physics 1965 NWL9D a 6378145 0 f 298 25 Naval Weapons Lab 1965 andrae a 6377104 43 rf 300 0 Andrae 1876 Den Iclnd aust_SA a 6378160 0 f 298 25 Australian Natl amp S Amer 1969 GRS67 a 6378160 0 f 298 2471674270 GRS 67 IUGG 1967 bessel a 6377397 155 rf 299 1528128 Bessel 1841 bess _nam a 6377483 865 rf 299 1528128 Bessel 1841 Namibia clrk66 a 6378206 4 b 6356583 8 Clarke 1866 clrk80 a 6378249 145 rf 293 4663 Clarke 1880 mod CPM a 6375738 7 f 334 29 Comm des Poids et Mesures 1799 delmbr a 6376428 f 311 5 Delambre 1810 Belgium engelis a 6378136 05 f 298 2566 Engelis 1985 evrst30 a 6377276 345 rf 300 8017 Everest 1830 evrst48 a 6377304 063 rf 300 8017 Everest 1948 evrst56 a 6377301 243 rf 300 8017 Everest 1956 evrst69 a 6377295 664 rf 300 8017 Everest 1969 evrstSS a 6377298 556 rf 300 8017 Everest Sabah amp Sarawak fschr60 a 6378166 f 298 3 Fischer Mercury Datum 1960 fschr60m a 6378155 rf 298 3 Modified Fischer 1960 fschr68
11. alsk Mod Stererographics of Alaska apian Apian Globular august August Epicycloidal bacon Bacon Globular bipc Bipolar conic of western hemisphere boggs Boggs Eumorphic bonne Bonne Werner lat_1 90 cass Cassini cc Central Cylindrical cea Equal Area Cylindrical chamb Chamberlin Trimetric collg Collignon crast Craster Parabolic Putnins P4 denoy Denoyer Semi Elliptical eck1 eck6 Eckert VI eqc Equidistant Cylindrical Plate Caree eadc Equidistant Conic euler Euler fahey Fahey fouc Foucaut fouc_s Foucaut Sinusoidal gall Gall Gall Stereographic geocent Geocentric xyz gins8 Ginsburg VIII TSNIIGAiK gn_sinu General Sinusoidal Series gnom Gnomonic goode Goode Homolosine gs48 Mod Stererographics of 48 U S gs50 Mod Stererographics of 50 U S hammer Hammer amp Eckert Greifendorff hatano Hatano Asymmetrical Equal Area imw_p International Map of the World Polyconic kav5 Kavraisky V kav7 Kavraisky VII krovak Krovak labrd Laborde laea Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area lagrng Lagrange larr Larrivee lask Laskowski latlong Lat long Geodetic Icc Lambert Conformal Conic lcca Lambert Conformal Conic Alternative leac Lambert Equal Area Conic lee_os Lee Oblated Stereographic loxim Loximuthal Isat Space oblique for LANDSAT SES 2000 User s Guide mbt_s McBryde Thomas Flat Polar Sine No 1 mb
12. application In this mode all incoming echo sounder data is transmitted via the TCP IP protocol to the connected network clients A network client is a computer running also SES for Windows but in Client Mode A SES Server can accept commands from external clients to change the system settings and parameters The SES 2000 system which runs in Server Mode will not accept system commands from the keyboard and mouse anymore There are some settings necessary to establish a network connection These settings are made in the Network dialog that shows up after invoking the SES Server Network Server Mode Messages Network Settings Connections Local Port 50096 Check to enable commands W not connected Local Server IPF 192 168 115 11 48 SES Server is not active 48 WAY Server is not active s SES SERVER ey NET CLOSED The server IP address is read automatically but should be known for the client computers The Local Port number has to be the same for the server and all clients Per default it is 50096 but any other number might be possible if some other services are running on that port within the local area network Once the server mode is started by clicking the SES Server button the SES 2000 system is listening on the network for incoming messages The Server Mode can be stopped at any time by clicking the button Net Closed If for any reason the network is not accessible for example due to wrong network card inst
13. floor water depth and MBES SBP range For ROV applications settings haven t to be changed during survey since ROV altitude is maintained constant and range settings will not change as well So one trigger setting will work for the entire survey Depth Threshold For all other vessel based operations the settings have to be adapted to General Transmit akami sa water depth and SBP range at ham SBP range length should be as small as possible to ensure best data quality If there are reliable and stable water depth values available from the engh 2m MBES centre beam it is possible to use the SESWIN Auto Range Start and Auto Range Start feed the water depth obtained by the MBES to the SES 2000 system For Adjust Ping Rate 100 this the Multi Purpose Input at the SES system is used This serial COM port is configured within the Options System Interfaces Multi Input dialog see section 5 11 3 on page 81 You have to set up the correct COM port settings data format and tick the check box Use external n ebs 11m depth for Auto Range For post processing purposes you should also tick Record Enabled and choose an appropriate SIS string Any value stored previously in this SIS string will be lost Ping Rate 0 00 pps Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 147 System Interfaces NMEA TYPE DESO 25 ELHOTRALC i Baud Rate Data
14. ping period Delay has to be smaller than the external trigger period Otherwise every second trigger event will be discarded Older SES systems may have different behaviour regarding external synchronisation Please note that Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Deep Sea Burst Mode will not work if the SES system runs as slave triggered externally These transmission modes are for internal triggering only Some more hints on how to use the SES 2000 systems together with other acoustic equipment and how to avoid interferences are given in section 7 13 on page 139 6 3 Alternating Trigger There is a third basic trigger mode available called Alternating Trigger In this mode the SES 2000 system is running as master device triggering other acoustic systems similar to Internal Trigger mode But with Alternating Trigger the trigger pulse at the Trigger OUT connector is not generated when the SES 2000 pings and there are some parameters to tune the trigger regime as described below Mode Alternating Trigger Settings f Intermal Trigger Internal pings prior to external device External Trigger Humber of external pings Time frame of external device pe 00000 Alternating Trigger is mainly intended for use at shallow water or for ROV based systems where high ping rates are achieved For this mode the user has to set three parameters e number of SES 2000 pings internal pings
15. 4 2 4 COM Ports Information SES Confipuration Fal This tab can be used to check which COM ports are available on the system Some port properties are obtained and gt High Speed Port displayed as well gt High Speed Port i f High Speed Part This function should be used for assigning COM ports manually in the System tab of this dialog Refresh List 4 2 5 Documenting SES Configuration settings screen dumps of all settings may be saved automatically by pressing the button on the lower right corner of the dialog cove Cal Innomar Technologie GmbH ee ee ee 5 SES for Windows SESWIN System Software 5 1 The SESWIN screen Main Menu Button Bar Hot Keys Level Display Depth Display SES for Windows Program Options Help Parameter te 5 Depth Threshold Menu in Range Process General Transmit P P ak os re I ECE CE Depth oe autre te a a See is ns saa i i i Ruler LF Pulses 2 Echo Plot T High Energy Mode rae ent Spread i AEA EE STE i h Screen MTEF remene Made HAE EE wena Boe RE Ie eee 2 oe aa iment yer Beam Steering Mode rn ols oa e Fey att Allow High Pulse Rate favicon y ma E i i ou a Deep Sea Pulse Mode sa a are a i D wr ae ne y aoe para PA N yt rete a e me a a Monitoring sis ms SIG map ara pe TAEA e e ae k pi a Windows Ba Ar naa named 5 t RES k 15ra Fange 125m 150m LF Freq 6kH2 LF Fulses 2 Profile 1 TTi Status Bar MIS 2007 11 23
16. E E JE a z Appl New Profile Event markers are set manually either by pressing the marker button Stec f leranre Men ber shown in the figure or using F12 on the keyboard It is also possible to set event markers via serial interface see section 7 16 1 on page 153 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 127 Event markers set using the trigger input lf the trigger input at the SES 2000 main unit is not Marker Draw Track Marker way units OU used for external synchronization see chapter 6 on page 99 a signal applied to that connector can be used to set event markers If the related option is W iat Wine saa seeielnah checked see figure markers are drawn if there is a M Draw Fix Marker i falling edge on the trigger input TTL signal detec wl Sern 22 Mathes 100 00 ted Use Trigger Input for Event Marker 7 10 2 How to set Track Markers Position Data Source Marker SIS Sting Number for Positions SIS String Number for Positions Draw Time Marker seconds 10 SIS ID for Fix Marker M Draw Fix Marker lz SIS ID for KP Marker M Draw KP Marker 100 00 SIS ID for optional 2nd Label Use Trigger Input for Event Marker W Exclude ero Values For this marker type you have to specify the position data source SIS fields containing the X and Y position Optionally all position values that are zero may be excluded from the processing lf the Draw Track Marker option i
17. Output Format Either Standard UTM or User defined see tab sheets below Standard UTM Conversion You can either select a certain UTM zone Conversion Settings Standard UTM Conversion User Defined Conversion number or let the software choose the zone number automatically The chosen zone UTM Zone Number Automatic Mode number can be Included into the calculated position data X Y strings User Defined Conversion A file containing the conversion parameters Conversion Setings Standard UTM Conversion User Defined Conversion has to be specified and the number of Parameter File o O E decimal digits can be set This is discussed in KeNumbernFi t001 detail in section 7 12 on page 132 Decimal Digits Innomar Technologie GmbH 86 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 11 8 System Interfaces Offsets System Interfaces Ed There are some settings for offset correction if your Position and Heading Data Source navigation data do not refer to SIS String Number for Position i the transducer s position SIS String Number for Position 2 T SIS String Number for Height Heading Data Source Motion Sensor bhe IMPORTANT W Exclude Zero Positions at andr If offset correction IS applied TP _wansducer position recalculated position data will Offset Correction for Transducer Offset Transducer units 0 00 Y Offset Transducer Y units 0 00 Coordinate Processing during System Mode Enable Transducer Offs
18. Stabilizing function of the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems a sensor with accuracy for pitch and roll better than 0 5 is required The following motion sensor data formats can be used e Format MRU normal Seatex Norway e Format MRU Standard e User Configurable Format TSS Great Britain e Format TSS 1 e Format EM 3000 e Format OCTANS Sid 1 The data formats are described in the appendix Connection of Navigation Instruments GPS The SES 2000 systems are equipped with a serial interface for the input of navigation data The serial port settings are adjustable via the SES for Windows SESWIN software It is possible to use any kind of navigation instrument that provides an ASCII output for the position data Possible data formats are NMEA compatible formats or plain text There is no hand shaking mechanism required For the set up of the data extraction see section 5 11 1 on page 77 Transport Boxes for the SES 2000 System Hardware All items of the SES 2000 systems are shipped in strong plastic boxes filled with anti shock foam These boxes are fitted for air and sea shipping and should be used during any trans port and storage Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 39 3 12 SES 2000 Front Panel Connectors and Switches Transducer connector You have to connect the transducer to the system unit before switching on the power ys The transducer cable has a sea water resistant polyurethane
19. The cable is moulded non removable to the transducer SES for Windows D Daten _ ProcessedD ata SES WIN iprep080620051 00947 ses lel Es Program Cptions Help Gain Range Process 30m 25m 20m 15m 10m 5m 5m 10m 15m 20m 25m Depth Threshold SSS ONE cee eres ree ERSS E General Transmit So 5 rer ee eae a Ship Travel raining F Area Profile f2 ool We Prone Reset Manuel Maker s GideScean Subbottom z FAN Mode bE P n CSE ms sig MAP SIS1 ES 97 5SIS2 E21 20 SIS3 E7 0 000 ss SIS4 00 1202 3 a SIS5 3 714 ni a ae y2 E ee Range 2m 32m 55 Freg 100kHz 55 Pulse 125ps Profile te File 4MB 08 06 2005 10 11 22 INT PRN o k Buf 0 Page 0 HD 36366MB t MS from file 4 SIS from file nn InnomarTechnologieGmbH sses lt iCO SES 2000 User s Guide 33 3 9 SES 2000 xxx AR Advanced Receiver Array For most SES 2000 systems there are variants with an additional receiver array AR available The receiver array increases the signal to noise ratio by 6 12dB Therefore the system gets an increased water depth range and or an enhanced sediment penetration capability The extra receiver array is discussed below There is an additional connector placed at the main unit s front panel to connect the receiver array to the SES 2000 xxx AR systems The figure shows the receiver array for the SES 2000 medium AR
20. depending on the transmitter settings chosen within the SESWIN software If you want to use the analogue input you should use an external trigger pulse as well see section 6 2 on page 100 Trigger In Out to trigger the shots external synchronization or e to create marks on the screen external marker events Trigger OUT Output of pulses to trigger other systems For some system variants there is a LED next to the Trigger OUT connector flashing every time a sync pulse is generated new systems only gt When SES 2000 is set to external synchronisation without feeding an appropriate pulse sequence to Trigger IN neither the LF nor the HF window will show any incoming echo data Always remember that when you invoke SES 2000 and nothing happens For a detailed description of the trigger options refer to section 6 on page 99 SES 2000 medium deep Interconnection Link To connect the main unit and the extension unit of the SES 2000 medium and SES 2000 deep systems there are two link cables point to point connections used The cables are about 2m long main unit extension unit Link connectors at the front panel Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 43 3 13 SES 2000 Rear Panel At the SES 2000 rear panel there is some information about the system and additional fuses pdt aig dius ay Le pone fi Product Type Serial Number Manufacturing Date Behind
21. ero Values lf the Draw Fix Marker option is checked markers are drawn on the screen and printed on the echo plots based on changes of a SIS string value specified in the Position Data Source section see figure The increment integer value has to be set as well If the Draw KP Marker option is checked markers are drawn on the screen and printed on the echo plots based on changes of a SIS string value specified in the Position Data Source section see figure The increment floating point has to be set as well Marker lines are labelled with the selected SIS string A second label can be chosen separately if needed in Position Data Source e g time string see figure SES for Windows Program Help LF ot HF Depth 301 06 m SN Threshold Transmit n tan T ees Tas Mo m IP e T PTa Caa ae z 5 me a i 1 gt a Tom mR i i cf i l LF Auta Gain Control lhe h HF Auto Gain Control Deep Water Amplifier p sis ms SIG MAP 349512077 214514677 FISHTIL 215013577 Z R i t a ne Cau 1 1 i x T i _ k m a a es ee y r T T UAE on i i ee a a k A Ti i k ig Barer oye k a4 oh a Fl o z 3 a P x ae om En 7 Sa wu La pe 1 z4 1 ci S z TE g ea d x E 2 L ba i yie no P r mha r _ 7 E ae Leg aiy al P 1 7 5
22. sig MAP SIST baie 153 lS S155 SISE Depth l Threshold General Transmit M m Gain ee Process rm Stark mi m Length 20 m 1m ne m iim Auto Range Start use LF aterdepth ie ie 5 _ m i zm Adjust Ping Rate 100 tl 14mi Ping Rate 15 11 pps 16m Foot Print 30B 0 2 mi Foot Print 6dB 0 3 mi 16m Aim SIS ms si MAP Sipe SIST al S33 5 rv 223m om S153 al at SIS5 aan E SISE ASA i ri _ _ _i If Dual Range mode is activated two ses data files envelope data are recorded one for each range If raw data full waveform data are recorded as well the extended range is used for raw files Ping rate depends on the extended range Therefore the ping rate might decrease substan tially if Dual Range is used especially in case of large extended ranges Innomar Technologie GmbH 76 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 10 10 System Settings Side Scan Option System Settings Ed In this dialog the settings for System Synchronisation Files View Marker using the optional side scan Multi Frequency Dual Range transducer are made E pana If the Side Scan Mode is C port left side k enabled the main screen B eae shows the side scan data in a eile typical waterfall display J Slant Correction where new data Is plotted on top of the screen and the window contents are scrolling down Only
23. 00 2000 00 cross 3 W Draw Marker on Cross Line Positions If cross lines are obtained by third party software survey planning or charting software for instance the cross line data file has to be a text file txt in the following format LO0 00 100 200 100200 ZO000 00 cross 1 OUUU 100 200 200 00 2000 00 CLOsSsZ 500 00 100 00 300 00 2000 00 Cross 3 There is one line per cross line containing values in the order as given in the dialog and separated by white spaces space or tab Multiple white spaces are treated as one leading white spaces are removed There must be no space characters within Name label Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 7 11 How to set up Navigation Data Interface SIS 131 7 11 1 There are different NMEA sentences but one of them is not comma separated Let s assume you have to use data from different more or less standard conform NMEA sentences e navigation data using GPRMC sentence e speed is obtained from a GPVTG sentence e time comes from GPZDA sentence and e there is a fourth sentence starting 6PKLA that contains space separated data instead of comma separated ones In this case you could set up SIS string extraction as follows e NMEA Addressi GPRMC e NMEA Address2 PKLA please note that it is possible to input the comma character e SIS String 1 to SIS String 3 are collected from the NMEA1 string SIS String 4 is collected from the NMEA2 string e
24. 1 Directivity Footprint The SES 2000 sub bottom profilers transmit very narrow sound beams the half power beam width is about 1 0 1 8 for the different systems see appendix for details 9 5 2 Beam Steering Most of the SES 2000 systems provide electronic beam steering and stabilization in a range of 15 see appendix for technical specs This feature is useful to compensate movements of the ship roll pitch by steering the sound beam always exactly vertically Another application for controlled beam steering is to direct the sound beam perpendicular to the seafloor while working on slopes Another application for controlled beam steering is the search for objects by transmitting beams at different angles subsequently as illustrated in the figure 9 5 3 Centre Frequency Pulse Length Bandwidth The SES 2000 sub bottom profilers cover a wide range of transmission frequencies The centre frequency is adjustable in the range of about 4 15kHz for most systems 2 7kHz for the SES 2000 deep The pulse length can be adjusted in the range of about 66 800us for most systems The centre frequency and bandwidth of the receiver will be adapted according to the selected transmission frequency and pulse length Technical specs for the different systems are given in the appendix With the SES 2000 sub bottom profilers it is possible to transmit very short sound pulses the on shortest pulse length is 66us 1
25. Analog Out power connector Motion sensor input Transducer connector USB control port SES 2000 standard medium deep Flo Disk ee USB ports 10 4 TFT Display PC network Navigation Input 2 Video Output Motion sensor T Input Keybord Mouse Depth Output connectors Printer System connector Hotkeys Display Fuse main Control power switch and power GND connector Analog In Out Link to extension Transducer Power connector Power control Trigger In Out unit SES 2000 connector SES 2000 deep LEDs medium deep Innomar Technologie GmbH 14 SES 2000 User s Guide 2 2 Installation and Basic Configuration of the SESWIN Software 2 2 1 Installing the SESWIN Software There is system software called SES for Windows or SESWIN for short that is delivered together with the SES 2000 system to manage the system s on line operation data acquisi tion as well as data replay This software is preinstalled on the built in control PC of the SES 2000 system To ensure proper operation of the system do not change the settings of the BIOS and the Windows OS and do not install any other software packages and device drivers If necessary the SESWIN software can be reinstalled as described in section 4 1 on page 47 2 2 2 Initial Setup using the SES Configuration Tool SES 2000 systems are delivered with a separate configuration tool sesconfig exe for basic system settings that has to be run before starting the SESWIN so
26. Bits Parity Stop Bits iiaia S 4900 C 38400 E one E MME Ty PE 9600 57600 oe odd C15 DEPTH WALUES ONLY 0 1939200 115200 fe g C even ee There are different data formats often used for depth values available within the SESWIN software A sample string is given in the bottom of the dialog Mult Purpose Input Input Values Depth Input z Data String Format NMEA TYPE ield ID Use External Depth for 4uto Range Function Od be Record Enabled SIS Sting Number to write data to E Sample String SDDBS 2 45 A general description of this dialog is given in section 5 11 3 on page 81 Cancel It is important to set the correction factor and depth offset properly The sound velocity correction factor has to be set according to the sound velocity values used within the multibeam and the SES systems Factor for sound velocity correction SES sound velocity MBES sound velocity Negative scale factors can be used to invert the incoming depth values if necessary The additional depth offset is used to remove any differences in the water depth s point of reference The SES water depth usually references to the water level supposing correct settings for the transducer draught With the correct setting for the water depth scale and offset the water depth values from the MBES shown in the assigned SIS string and the water depth obtained by the SES system should be more or less ide
27. Input Keybord Mouse Depth Output connectors Printer System connector Hotkeys Display Fuse main Control power switch and power GND connector Analog In Out Link to extension Transducer Power control Trigger In Out unit connector LEDs The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 Innomar Technologie GmbH 26 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 5 3 SES 2000 medium Extension Unit The SES 2000 medium system consists of two electronic blocks the main unit similar to the SES 2000 standard system and an extension unit containing additional power amplifiers Transducer connectors Link to main unit Fuse main power switch power control and power LEDs connector The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 If the power of the SES 2000 medium system is not required for instance in shallow water it can be operated without the extension unit like a SES 2000 standard system This has to be set up in the Options System Settings of the SESWIN program see section 5 10 1 on page 66 On the other hand it is also possible to upgrade special prepared SES 2000 standard systems into SES 2000 medium systems For this the standard system has to be ordered with the medium upgrade option see appendix A 3 on page 223 3 5 4 SES 2000 medium Transducer The SES 2000 medium transducer is available in two versions one for installation on a pole and another for permanent
28. Local Fort 50096 Server F i 932 168 115 852 Festat 05 of SES Serwer 48 SES Client is not active 48 WAY Client is not active e SES CLIENT ot NET CLOSED gt This dialog must not be closed during remote controlled operation closing the dialog will finish the network connection If the window overlaps with other important windows just move it The server must be known and has to be identified with its Server P address The Local Port number has to be the same for the server and the client Per default it is 50096 but any other number might be possible if some other services are running on that port within the local area network Once the client mode is started by clicking the button SES Client the SESWIN program is trying to connect to the server with the specified IP address The Client Mode can be stopped at any time by clicking the button Net Closed If for any reason the network connection cannot be established for example due to wrong network card installation or wrong IP address the SES Client button will be automatically disabled lf more than one client are connected to the server then the first one will be served and the other ones will not receive any data but are still connected to the server All network status and error messages are visible at the page Messages of this dialog lf the network configuration is fine and the SES Client is connected and working properly the LED at the dialog bottom is highl
29. LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 44cm Housing 19 inch 9U Weight About 49 kg Optional a housing for rough environments is available a A Transducer ee Dimensions LxWxH 30 cm x 26cm x 7 cm Weight incl 30m cable about 30 kg The transducer cable is moulded non removable to the transducer The cable length is fixed to 30m Optionally the SES 2000 system can be prepared for easy upgrading into a SES 2000 medium system see appendix A3 on page 223 SES 2000 standard Technical Data Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver dimensions of active area about 0 2m x 0 2m half power beam width for transmission 1 8 Transmitter primary frequency about 100kHz secondary frequency 4 5 6 8 10 12 15kHz user adjustable pulse width 66 500us user adjustable optionally up to 800us transmission pulses CW Ricker Multi frequency Signals e Transmitting channels 16 Electrical Pulse Power gt 18 kW Transmitting Sensitivity gt 239 dB uPa re 1m Heave Compensation yes depending on valid motion sensor data G Roll Pitch Compensation and Roll compensation by electronic beam steering in a range of 32 deg Pulse Repetition Rate lt 30 s Deep Sea Pulse Mode Deep Sea Burst Mode renee fpo boe wi ian Puse Rae Moget o up to 50m depends on sediment frequency noise level Multiple Target Resolution gt 5 cm depends on frequency and pulse length Accuracy 100 kHz 0 02 m 0 02 o
30. Manager Windows Start Settings Control Panel or the Ports section of the SES configuration tool Using Windows Device Manager amp Control Panel System Properties File Edit View Favorites Tools Help System Restore Automatic Updates Remote z General ComputerName Hardware Advanced J gt S A Search a Folders S 3 x i Gi Address GC Control Panel The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed on your computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device Y Accessibility Add Administr Automatic BDE Verw Date and Display Folder Options Hardware mit Tools Updates Time Options Drivers B p Device Manager Sa Fi vA f Figs Driver Signing lets you make sure that installed drivers are gt i or compatible with Windows Windows Update lets you set up J us how Windows connects to Windows Update for drivers Game InterBase Internet Java Keyboard Mouse Network Network NVIDIA Phone and Controllers Manager Options Connections Setup SoundSto aden S C eseVsesD Power Printers and QuickTime Regional Scanners Scheduled Security Soundsand Speech Options Faxes and La and C Tasks Center Audio De Hardware Profiles Hardware profiles provide a way for you to set up and store ze different hardware configurations __ A Hardware Profiles Taskbar and User Windows Wireless Start Menu Accounts Firew
31. Mouse GPS Multi Purpose Port Input RSME i p tees Disable Auto Detection for SES ports Disable Auto Detection for all ports Printer Port Settings Printer Port Address HE 0378 C Enable Auto Detection for all ports crcl In any case the correct printer model or language has to Printer Language be set up in the SESWIN Options System Interfaces Hewlett Packard PCL 3 Printer dialog shown above Select between the HP printer Hewlett Packard PCL 5 languages or different thermal paper printers f EPC 1086 Family The HP printers will produce echo plots in real time page by fF EPC gs00 page The thermal printers produce grey scaled echo plots C ULTRA 120 on rolls or sheets EPC thermo printers should be set to Interface parallel Shades 16 Media Type paper Data Type 6 bit Width 2048 Innomar Technologie GmbH 126 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 10 How to set marker lines in the echoprint You can make marker lines in the echoprint manually or initiated by an external device It is also possible to have marker lines drawn automatically into the echoplot based on either track made good time or a SIS string value This has to be set up in the SESWIN System Seitings see section 5 10 5 on page 70 System Settings System Files View Position Data Source Marker SIS String Number fore Position Draw Track Marker way units 100 SIS String Number for Position g S15 ID for Fis Marker
32. SESWIN window and stores the picture in BMP or GIF format xl 5 2 2 Options Menu Cyptions The System Settings and System Interfaces System Settings have to be set properly before the survey starts System Interfaces see sections 5 10 on page 66 and 5 10 on page Depth 66 respectively These settings were called Login at Startup a l n General Options in older SESWIN versions A ae eee Depending on the network settings made in the 515 GP5 Heading via Network Port SES Configuration tool see section 4 2 on page Broadcast Server 47 this menu contains different entries for the Travet SIS Monitor network options see section 5 12 on page 87 MCP Monitor The SIS and MCP monitor are described in section 5 13 on page 92 5 2 3 Help Menu Program Options About SES for Windows SES for Windows System Info EH et About The Help menu items are only available in file Version 1 7 Build 1 7 1 38 SM 2006 7 9 mode D2006 by Innamar Technologie GmbH The System Info box gives some information useful Coordinate Tranztormatiorn ProLat BLL for troubleshooting like serial numbers software S206 by Effective Ubjects versions and memory space The About box shows the software version and the SES 2000 serial number see screenshot Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 53 5 3 SESWIN Button Bar Hot Keys SES for Windows alg l l
33. SIS String 5 to SIS String 8 are collected from the NMEA1 string Due to the fact that the NMEA2 string does not contain comma characters for separation we use an offset of 46 bytes to get a sub string out of the NMEA field number two Position 2 System Interfaces Baud Rate C 4800 38400 f 9600 57600 C 19200 115200 Data Bits i B c 7 fe g Stop Bits fe leet Le Parity non C odd C even String Extraction Mode Address J Zi T Position ength MRE AT SIS Stringi SIS Stings SIS Strings SIS String SIS Stringh SIS Strirng SIS String SIS String NMEAT NMEAT NMEA MMEA NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT 3 qF 5 2 1 2 2 3 2 BE 7 e l gt o o ah 4h A fo Wi a ao oOo o oO ae ae ab dF H Fa q 4 co ws om ah dF F 4 qF SIS String for PC Time Synchronisation di abled NMEA Compatible Output Trigger SIS String GPRMC HMEAZ FELA NMEAS GPVTG NMEA GPZDA Load Scheme Save Scheme Cancel Innomar Technologie GmbH 132 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 12 How to set up UTM conversion Within the SESWIN program it is possible to transform WGS84 coordinates into UTM coordi nates by using either standard or user defined transformation parameters This feature has to be set up in the SESWIN Options System Interfaces Coordinates tab sheet see
34. SNR gets better with decreasing revolution speed The noise level decreases with increasing centre frequency PSGUERG w pulse Bact P of the noise evel Speed ae gain neniani left pulse length constant 500 us The SNR gets better with increasing frequency right frequency constant 10 kHz The SNR gets better with increasing pulse length To avoid interferences with the noise that is produced by ship s engine the transducer should be placed as far away as possible from the engine Since the engine and the propeller is at the rear end of the ship the transducer should be placed at the front half of the ship At small boats the best place for the transducer is at the bow Innomar Technologie GmbH 110 SES 2000 User s Guide To avoid the impact of noise by vibrations onto the transducer it should be mechanically de coupled from the vessel Especially the steel to steel connections on the flange and on the pipe should be decoupled using elastic material like rubber plastics or wood This is illus trated in the figures below Elastic material Acoustic decoupling of the transducer from the vessel using elastic material between the steel to steel connections Note also the ropes to stabilize the pipe rubber plastic sleeves SES 2000 SBP transducer SES 2000 sidescan transducer rope to stabilize the pipe Installation of SES 2000 transducers over the side using a pipe Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 20
35. Settings are made via Options System Settings Map It is possible to zoom into the map and to highlight run lines and targets SIS SIS1 Sears 995 Heave gs2 10172 830 Fall 553 179 946 Fitch SlS4 117738 Yaw 555 42 Heading 143 9 SSE TE Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 57 5 7 Status Bar The status bar is situated on the bottom of the SESWIN window Range 3030m 3050m LF Freg kHz LF Pulses 1 Profile 1 30 01 2007 14 01 00 ExT 4 PRN no paper Bul 0 Page 0 HD 7287MB 4 HS no data SIS no data 8 MCP no data The upper line of the Status Bar shows information about e the chosen range which is displayed on the monitor or printer and recorded to file e the selected LF frequency and LF pulse length e the actual profile number and e the actual file size System Mode or the replay position in the data file File Mode This is not shown in the figure above If raw full waveform data is acquired file size of both files is displayed The lower line of the Status Bar shows e the system date and time can be synchronized to GPS time automatically via Options System Interfaces SIS Time Synch e trigger source INTernal EXTernal synchronization as set via Options System Settings System e the status of the built in HD and the status of the connected external devices such as printer PRN motion sensor MS and navigation system SI
36. There is a mounting bracket with 4 holes placed on the motion sensor housing to ease the mounting near the transducer Some more hints how to install and setup a motion sensor to work with the SES 2000 systems are given in section 7 3 on page 113 3 14 2 Installing GPS The SES 2000 systems are equipped with a serial interface to attach a GPS device To avoid position errors caused by antenna offsets the GPS antenna should be placed on top of the transducer If this is not possible an antenna offset correction can be applied within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces Offsets see section 5 11 8 on page 86 For this accurate and reliable heading information is necessary To use the position data delivered by the GPS device within the SES 2000 systems some settings have to be made within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces SIS see section 5 11 1 on page 77 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 45 3 15 SES 2000 power supply requirements 3 15 1 Mean power consumption The power consumption of the SES 2000 SBPs depends on e pulse repetition rate How many pings are transmitted per second e transmission frequency and e transmission pulse length In general the power consumption is a function of the pulse duty cycle but for lower frequencies the inrush current will be higher than for higher frequencies at the same duty cycle The duty cycle DC is calcu
37. Tools Main menu Program Some tools are available for the file management of the recorded SES data Browser File Cutter Directory Selection Directory Selection Name Name DASES Applications Data Browse DASES Applications D ata Browse File Selection File Selection Date Profile Area He 5 File Name Date Start Time Stop Time Size KB Profile rea 08 01 2007 Profi2 z Kihlungsbom x 2 08012007142026 ses 08 01 2007 14 20 27 143315 32548 1 Kiihlungsbomn 0801 2007150921 ses 5 09 2 1 Kuhlungsborn i 0801 2007152400 ses 08 01 2007 15 24 00 15 32 01 18875 1 Kuhlungsborn o Time 0801 2007180045 ses 08 01 2007 18 00 45 18 17 53 34488 1 Kuhlungsborn v BB Profile LJ Area File Cut Zoom 10 1 lism v File Info AERA Name D SES Applications D ata 0801 2007192932 ses eea From Pos hel nse Bat are A Ra R it Baw eg iai a aoe ae Size 34488 KByte cS MEE ii ee k RAP z Time 19 29 32 19 43 49 To Pos Profile 2 Frequency 8 KHz 7 3 Pulses 1394 e Cancel Load Cancel A File Browser is used for easier selection of A File Cutter is used for the creation of data recorded data to replay with the SES software files with sub selections of areas of interest It provides an alternative method for file from bigger data sets access These tools are described in section 5 14 on page 93 of this manual Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 19 2 4 Checklist for System Setup
38. and position data via serial interface to other equipment Depth Output every second fon new SIS data continuously Separator Character f comma f space Sample String 5E5 11 26 40 2 45 2 60 51517 5152 5153 5154 COM Port serial interface Settings These parameters have to be set according to the receiving equipment you want to transmit the data to Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity Depth Output The depth output defines the time interval between the data strings that are transferred to the serial interface e every second e onnew SIS data on incoming navigation data SIS string number defined in the SIS dialog see previous subsection e continuously with every ping Data Format The system supports several data formats an example is given in the Sample String box e The SES 96 format is user configurable The values can be defined separately in the Output Values group e The INNOMAR SHORT and INNOMAR LONG ASCII formats may be used with third party software like HYPACK survey software e The NMEA DBS DESO 25 and ECHOTRAC format simulate other echo sounder data formats that are maybe recognized by third party survey software e The CLONE INPUT format copies the incoming Navigation Input data Separator Character For the SES 96 format the separator character for the output string can be defined comma or space Output Values Here you can define the contents of the output
39. and the SES Client is connected and working properly the LED at the dialog bottom is highlighted green otherwise the LED is highlighted red If the client is successfully connected to the server echo sounder data from the server are received and displayed in the same form as with a real SES 2000 system If the server allows the command transmission for the active client then the same parameter settings are possible as during normal system operation It is possible to shutdown restart Windows on the server computer Additional Options Keep in mind that the system might be still powered on and a manual restart of SESWIN and or server mode might be necessary if not set for auto start The Client Mode can be stopped at any time by clicking the button Net Closed Innomar Technologie GmbH 158 SES 2000 User s Guide General hints for network remote control e The network dialog must not be closed during remote controlled operation closing the dialog will finish the network connection If the window overlaps with other important windows just move it e Make sure to use the same SESWIN version on both server and client computers same serial number Otherwise the network connection will not set up properly and remote controlled operation will not be possible e For remote controlled systems the server should be switched off first if it is set for automatic start up important for SES 2000 ROV systems e Some possible TCP IP errors
40. are stored in the recorded data file Thus it s possible to re process heave values using the ISE post processing software Innomar Technologie GmbH 84 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 11 6 System Interfaces Printer System Interfaces Ed This dialog controls the online echoprint Border Cycle Printer Options appearance You have to Wo 1 Time Date No amp Time Date High Print Quality at File Mode choose the printer model No 2 Range Noi0 sis1 sis2 m ee Data and to set the values to be Us Seas oe printed in the margin Mo 3 515 7 515 8 Mo 11 515 3 515 4 l i ACIS angre information area Mo 4 EE 3 S15 4 Mo 12 Time Date f Hewlett Packard PCL 3 Ad C Hewlett Packard PCL 5 No amp SIS5 SIS6 No 1 Range Dak A e EN A sample echoprint is Mo 6 Time Date No 14 EE q1 515 2 C EPC g300 shown and described in No 5151 5152 No15 5153 5154 l C ULTRA 120 section 5 16 on page 96 No 8 S535154 No 16 5155 5156 l A detailed description how to get online echogram prints is given in section 7 9 on page 124 Border Cycle Select SIS data strings for print annotation in margin repeats every 16 lines You can decide here which SIS information you want to print Printing of these values is switched on off within the Printer Options on the right Printer Options There are some general options for the echoprint generation usually tick Print
41. area of the transducer has to be clean Especially when operating in warm water there might be some fouling that must be removed to prevent the transducer from over heating Don t use chemicals or sharp tools to remove the fouling the transducer s surface must not be damaged The active area of the transducer must not be exposed to strong sunlight for a longer period since UV light affects the chemical and mechanical properties of the material used Thermal stress e g putting sun heated transducers into cold water has to be avoided as well Furthermore no paint oil or grease should be put on the active area of the transducer Hull mounted transducers should be removed or protected by cover plates when the ship is main tained and painted in the yard The transducer cable has to be protected against damages The minimal bend radius of the cable is about 20cm Don t use a cable with damaged insulation The plug is not waterproof and should be protected to avoid corrosion at the electrical connections The cable is moul ded non removable to the transducer Innomar Technologie GmbH 3 10 3 Transducer installation In general the transducer installation should be made according to the following guidelines Transducer depth The upper water layers are filled with small air bubbles especially in heavy seas Air bubbles absorb acoustic energy and may block the desired acoustic signal entirely Therefore select a location as deep as possible for
42. arithmetic mean of the major and minor axis is used R_a a b 2 Used with elliptical Earth parameters Geometric mean of the major and minor axis R_g ab Used with elliptical Earth parameters Harmonic mean of the major and minor axis R_h 2ab a b Used with elliptical Earth parameters Spherical radius of the arithmetic mean of the principle radii of the ellipsoid at latitude R_lat_a is used R_lat_g R_lat_a can be use for equivalent geometric mean of the principle radii Used with elliptical Earth parameters Geometric mean of the principle radii at latitude R_lat_g See R_lat_a Selects conversion of Cartesian values to units specified by name When used other metric parameters must be in meters When this option is present it treats the latitude angle of the other coordinate system as geocentric instead of the normal geodetic This may not make sense for some coordinate systems so care is required Inhibit reduction of input longitude values to a range within 180degrees of the central meridian Datum shifts can be approximated by 3 parameter spatial translations in geocentric xyz space or 7 parameter shifts translation rotation scaling A brief description is given below Specify a grid file or list of files to use in shifting a coordinate from a datum to WGS84 Innomar Technologie GmbH 136 Available Projection Names aea Albers Equal Area aeqd Azimuthal Equidistant airy Airy altoff Aitoff
43. bottom profiler SES 2000 Its structure Organization and code are the valuable trade secrets of INNOMAR The software also is protected by international treaty provisions You may use trademarks only insofar as required to identify printed output produced by the software in accordance with accepted trademark practice including identification of trademark owner s name Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark Except as stated above this Agreement does not grant you any intellectual property rights in the software INNOMAR reserves the right to terminate this license if any terms of this Agreement are violated Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 Parametric Sub bottom Profiler User s Guide SES 2000 compact SES 2000 light SES 2000 standard SES 2000 medium SES 2000 deep SES 2000 ROV Innomar Technologie GmbH V 2 8 June 2009 Innomar Technologie GmbH Schutower Ringstr 4 D 18069 Rostock Germany Telephone 49 0 381 44079 0 Fax 49 0 381 44079 299 info innomar com http www innomar com Innomar Technologie GmbH 4 SES 2000 User s Guide Disclaimer THE SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE IS BEING DELIVERED TO YOU AS IS AND INNOMAR MAKES NO WARRANTY AS TO ITS USE OR PERFORMANCE INNOMAR DOES NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION INOMAR AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AS TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF TH
44. but any other number might be possible if some other services are running on that port within the local area network Start the server mode by pressing the SES Server button The SES 2000 system is listening on the network for incoming messages Commands via the local keyboard and mouse are not accepted any more All network status and error messages are visible at the page Messages of this dialog If for any reason the network is not accessible for example due to wrong network card installation the SES Server button will be automatically disabled If the network configu ration is fine and the SES Server is listening and working properly the LED at the dialog s bottom is highlighted green otherwise the LED is highlighted red If a client is successfully connected to the server the client s IP address is shown at the right side of the dialog It is possible to enable or disable the acceptance of incoming messages from the client to change the system parameters e The Server Mode can be stopped at any time by clicking the button Net Closed Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 157 Remote computer client settings Start the SES configuration tool sesconfig exe and set network operation as client SES Configuration System Network Display Network Settings Network Options Application Mode mo f Stand Alone System fed COM Ports f External PC selectable COM Ports COM Port Settings SIS Interta
45. by e serial interface only basic operation commands possible e KVM extension recommended remote control e local area network connection Multi Purpose Input connector Network LAN connector keyboard mouse monitor video connectors KVM 7 16 1 Simple remote control via serial interface It is possible to control basic system functions using a serial interface COM port This feature is not intended to provide full remote control but for example to switch on off transmission or recording controlled by a central computer For this the Multi Purpose Input is used labelled Serial 1 on some systems This port can t be used for any other purpose while used for remote control First the Multi Purpose Input System Interfaces COM port has to be set up via SESWIN Main Menu Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bite C aeoo C 38400 6 non E Options System Interfaces phe east e IIa ee Ne Multi Input C 19200 C 115200 g C even P The COM port parameters GS oe have to be set according to N M A E the requirements of the a ee ae remote computer E ae J Set Multi Purpose Input to et E Record Input Ditar O Remote Control Now Record Enabled S15 Sting Number to write data to E a commands can be sent to the Sample Strin system as NMEA compatible asa ASCII strings see table on next page Innomar Technologie GmbH 154 SES 2000 User s Guide NM
46. containing transmitters receivers amplifiers Power supply unit Transducer array used to transmit and receive the signals cable length 30m Workstation optional to remote control the system via network LAN Remote control also possible via KVM extension see section 7 14 on page 148 The electronics is separated into __ three units for easy handling and oo D transportation These units have to be placed close together the cables used for interconnection j have a length of about 2 meters I 3 units tobe put 5N close together interconnections lt 2m For permanent installation it is also possible to mount the three components into one 19 inch rack Workstation o a _ 7 ee Transducer Cables length 30m The transducer is split into 3 sections for easy handling too It has to be installed into a moon pool or fitted to the ship s hull using a streamlined housing Network connection Transducer Array length lt 100m 3 sections transducer power and link cables extension unit main unit power supply The technical specs including dimensions and weight of the system components and sketches of the transducer are given in the appendix Innomar Technologie GmbH 28 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 6 2 SES 2000 deep Main Unit Flo Disk Ppy USB ports 10 4 TFT Display PC network Navigation Input Vide
47. dF h Draw Time Marker seconds Draw Fis Marker 1 M Draw EF Marker 1 00 00 Use Trigger Input for Event Marker SIS ID for RP Marker SIS ID for optional 2nd Label f We Exclude ero Values Cross Lines Cross Line Definitions Start Position Start Position r Stop Position Stop Position Name Draw Marker on Cross Line Positions Cancel The automatically created marker lines are visible on the screen and in the online echoprint The marker positions will not be stored in the data file but marker lines can be applied again in post processing ISE software Event markers set either manually using the keyboard or initiated by a signal at the trigger input connector are stored in the data file 7 10 1 How to set Event Markers Event markers are labelled with a number 1 999 that is incremen Depth Threshold ted automatically by 1 You can reset the marker number by pressing Gain Range Process the related button in the Parameter Menu see figure on the right General Transmit Marker number and position are stored within the SES data files and Ship can be searched for within the ISE post processing software It is not possible to annotate event markers you should take notes at a R separate protocol if you set event markers to remember the event that was connected to an event number Area po Event markers set manually using keyboard mouse COM Options Help Protile l 5
48. data X Y strings 7 12 4 User defined conversion A file containing the conversion parameters has to be specified and the number of decimal digits can be set see figure below Farameter File T kep Number in File 001 h Decimal Digits The parameter file to be used can be selected using a file browser by pressing the button A parameter file may contain different conversion settings labelled with a key number see next subsection You have to know which key number is valid and specify it in the edit box You have also to specify the number of decimal digits to be used in your data output gt Before applying user defined UTM conversion it is strongly recommended to check the conversion parameters on known coordinates Innomar Technologie GmbH 134 SES 2000 User s Guide Parameter File This subsection gives an overview about the parameters necessary for user defined conversion This information is derived from the ProLat DLL manual and provided as is For user defined conversion you have to supply a parameter file that consists of the following basic elements Comment follows this character and continues to the end of the line lt key gt Begin a coordinate system definition with a key name enclosed in angle brackets lt gt End a definition with no_defs followed by empty angle brackets See next subsection for parameters that may go between the Begin and End flags to define a coordinate
49. detail in section 3 12 on page 39 3 3 3 SES 2000 light Transducer The length of the cable that connects the transducer to the main unit is 20m for compact and light systems The weight and the dimensions depend on the used transducer frame Typical values weight with 20m cable about 25kg dimensions about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm WHD The cable is moulded non removable to the transducer 3 9 on page 33 Innomar Technologie GmbH 3 4 SES 2000 standard 3 4 1 SES 2000 standard System Overview lt a Tiere his oy 7a Ta a e Main unit containing all electronic components and control PC e Housing 19 cabinet with 9 height units about 52cm x 44cm x 40cm 49kg e Transducer about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm 30kg incl cable Technical specs and a sketch of the transducer are given in the appendix 3 4 2 SES 2000 standard Main Unit Flo Disk i USB ports 10 4 TFT Display PC network Navigation Input Video Output Motion senso mee Keybord Mouse Printer System connector Hotkeys Display Fuse main Control power switch and power connector GND Analog In Out Transducer Power control Trigger In Out connector LEDs The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 Optionally the SES 2000 standard system can be prepared for easy upgrading to SES 2000 medium see appendix A 3 page 223 for details The front panel is than like shown on page 25 3 4 3 SES
50. e g for seabed classification The number of used frequencies decreases the ping rate This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 light systems it is available optionally High Energy Signals This option is useful to enable extra long transmit signals while working in deep water areas Longer signals will increase the signal to noise ratio and hence give better penetration On the other hand longer signals may also decrease the layer resolution This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally Allow High Pulse Rate At shallow waters and in small ranges the pulse repetition rate can be increased That results in better horizontal resolution and an increased signal to noise ratio An increased pulse rate is particularly useful while looking for small embedded objects This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally Deep Sea Pulse Mode This option allows high ping rates even at deep water areas to achieve higher data quality and resolution This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally Chirp Signal This option available for SES 2000 medium and deep systems only allows t
51. e number of external pings e time frame of external device The external device that has to be triggered by the SES 2000 system should run in a fixed regime fixed range The resukting ping rate has to be determined and the time for one cycle has to be set as time frame of externbal device within the Alternating trigger settings Innomar Technologie GmbH 106 SES 2000 User s Guide These settings and their effect on the trigger regime is illustrated in the figured below Anana aer Selb Both systems pinging alternating SES 2000 e E E EE pings once and generates an external trigger A Or E elle pulse after finishing data acquisition Then waits Time frame of external device us ooo for the specified time after the external trigger pulse before starting the new transmission SES Ping SES sample range E P E E E ea one TX cycle Trigger pulse at Time frame of Trigger OUT external device Mie de Hite Migger Jelling SES 2000 transmits twice per transmit cycle Internal pings prior to external device Otherwise the same as above Number of external pings Time frame of external device pa i OOO00 SES Ping SES sample range E i p Po fo E foo one TX cycle Trigger pulse at Time frame of il Trigger OUT external device Alternating Trigger Settings SES 2000 transmits once and generates two CE
52. gt lt 1006 gt proj tmerc lon_O 15 lat_O 0 k 1 0 x_0 5500000 y_0O 0 ellps bessel FLOWOSO4 00 0 4D yolwop a Lo p04 1967 04092 a 601 pH 8 299 Fun temm nodeg lt gt Please note that there are several conversion settings defined in this file labelled with key numbers 1001 1006 There are no empty lines within the file and no line breaks within a definition Please also note the comment on translation and rotation parameter s direction Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 135 Parameter List The following parameters and usage varies with the projection selected The options are processed in left to right order Re entry of an option is ignored with the first occurrence assumed to be the desired value No spaces may be placed around the equal sign A parameter without an equal sign shown below will activate that option without requiring additional parameter information proj name ellps name datum name X_0 yY VU lon_0 lat_0 k or k _0 a b e S e f rf R R_ A R_V R_a R_g R_h R_lat_a R_lat_g units name geoc over towgs84 nadgrids file Required for selection of the transformation and name is from the list of available projections see below This option allows selection of standard predefined ellipsoid figures This parameter is required if the datum parameter is not used For spherical only projections the ma
53. hints for trouble shooting regarding motion sensor issues are given in section 8 8 on page 178 7 3 1 Motion Sensor Installation The sensor has to be fixed firmly and must not vibrate It should be placed as close as possible to the SES 2000 transducer If that is not possible make sure the lever arm correction of the motion sensor is set correctly For lever arm correction please refer to your motion sensor manual It is also important to ensure the right orientation of the motion sensor related to the transducer For the MRU Z motion sensor INNOMAR provides a splash water proof housing intended to protect the MRU placed outdoor e g on deck The housing has no depth rating and must not be installed under water There is a mounting bracket with 4 holes placed on the motion sensor housing to ease the mounting near the transducer The performance of the motion sensor can be improved by providing additional information like heading course or speed of the ship Therefore some motion sensors are able to use NMEA sentences sent by a GPS receiver to get the necessary information Often the VTG sentence is used to obtain the speed of the vessel 7 3 2 SESWIN Motion Sensor Setup System Interfaces After installing the motion sensor some settings are Model Format necessary within the Eo Tae SESWIN software Main C TSS Sensor Std oe Menu Options System f 755 1 Compatible pitch EM 3000 bees Interfaces Motion Sensor Po
54. indicate the area visible in the ISE echoprint area overview box calculate distance slope direction velocity between two cursor positions tool box show an magnified part of the echoprint around current cursor position Zoom box show position track of the entire data file and indicate position at cursor track box pick and digitize object positions and dimensions target picker Some of these toolboxes are also shown in the picture above To recalculate echoprints there are different signal processing options like equidistant mapping along track tide correction heave compensation and swell filtering applying sound velocity profiles noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing algorithms spike and ghost removal normalize gain different colour mapping instantaneous amplitude phase frequency or apparent polarity full waveform data only SAS processing option digitize water depth sediment layers as well as object positions and dimensions overlay probe data e g sediment or density probes convert improve position data or other auxiliary data lt is also possible to cut or assemble SES data files There are also tools available to assist geophysical interpretation Optionally there is also a seabed classification module available Calculated data can be stored in different formats for documentation or for further processing with ISE or third party software echoprin
55. kg Optional a transducer for hull mounting is available The transducer cables are moulded non removable to the transducer The cable length is fixed to 30m On small boats the SES 2000 medium system can be operated like a SES 2000 standard system by using only the main unit SES 2000 medium Technical Data Parameter Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver dimensions of active area about 0 45m x 0 40m half power beam width for transmission 1 0 Transmitter primary frequency about 100kHz secondary frequency 3 5 5 6 8 10 12 15kHz user adjustable pulse width 66 800us user adjustable transmission pulses CW Ricker Chirp Multi frequency Signals Option Chirp Signal LFM 4 15kHz 1 2ms Transmitting channels 48 Electrical Pulse Power Transmitting Sensitivity gt 246 dB uPa re 1m Heave Compensation yes depending on valid motion sensor data Roll Pitch Compensation and Roll compensation by electronic beam steering in a range of 32 deg Beam Steering depending on valid motion sensor data Multiple Target Resolution Innomar Technologie GmbH 214 SES 2000 User s Guide Accuracy 100 kHz 0 02 m 0 02 of water depth 10 kHz 0 04 m 0 02 of water depth at pulse length 0 1ms TTL SES 2000 as master TTL max 12V low active SES 2000 as slave Data Record 2 channels primary frequency HF and secondary frequency LF both channels envelope and full
56. m s f 100 kHz Subbottom and Sidescan Traneducer T OK Cancel f 200 kHz Subbottorm only Parametric __ Cancel f B00 kHz Analog Input Cancel Transducer Depth Draught of the Transducer s bottom below water surface Must be set properly to get correct water depths and echo plots related to water surface If set to 0 zero all echo plots and given depth values are related to the transducer Sound Velocity in Water The measured or estimated sound speed is used for all depth calculations and has to be set properly The SESWIN software can calculate water sound velocity depending on salinity temperature and depth Signal Source option either the transducer default or optionally an external signal fed to the SES 2000 main unit via Analogue Input connector In this case you should also use external synchronisation For some systems there is also AR Receiver available System Operation This Box is only available with SES 2000 medium systems These sys tems can be operated without the extension unit like the SES 2000 standard system using either the medium or a standard transducer Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 67 HF Selection option For some systems different sources for the HF channel may be selected 5 10 2 System Settings Synchronisation System Settings Ed In this dialog there are meee wal Alar Side Sean settings for synchronizing System View Maker Ma
57. motion sensor data roll and or pitch values depending on system and transducer type will be used to stabilize the generated sound beam Not available with SES 2000 compact and light systems It is possible to apply static offset angle values The roll and pitch angles can be swapped in case the transducer is rotated That s important for the SES 2000 ROV system Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 83 5 11 5 System Interfaces MRU Lever Arm System Interfaces This defines lever arms and switch on off lever arm cor Dtfsets rection for heave compen Offset From CG to Motion Sensor m sation x o oo v 0 00 Z 0 00 Both original and process Offset From CG to Monitoring Point m a ed heave values are stored foo vpo z fooo sa fe within the recorded data file CG centre of gravity 5 f MS motlon sensor Lever Arm Processing during System Mode MP monitoring point Enable Lever Arm Correction Cancel Offsets There are two vectors to be defined One pointing from centre of gravity CG to the place there the motion sensor is located and one vector pointing from CG to the place there the heave has to be monitored Lever arm geometry Here the coordinate system and geometry definition used for offset input are shown Lever arm processing during system mode Switch on off on line lever arm correction If on line correction is enabled both original and processed heave data
58. of this pulse representing the start of transmission has a delay of about Mus to the oe ase IN pea S oe signal Trigger OUT Transducer Ping TA ike eal pulse can e pecane active if the previous eie si rani and sampling is finished Otherwise this external pulse is neglected and only the next one can cause SES 2000 to transmit its sound ping The selected range however determines the duration of transmitting and sampling So depending on the selected range and the frequency of the triggering signal it may happen that SES 2000 does not ping with every trigger pulse That means when the trigger frequency is too high for the chosen range only every second or third pulse may initiate a transmission 6 2 2 External Synchronisation with Delay It is possible to apply an additional time delay between the incoming trigger event and the sound ping transmission This feature is useful if the triggering device for instance a boomer causes noise in the SES 2000 data at the moments it transmits the shot Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pE o000 7 50 m Delay as percentage of range 4 Number of pings for one sync pulse f Alternating Trigger Please keep in mind that there is a fixed delay of about 1ms before the sound ping is generated in external synchronisation mode in any case see above The figure below shows the trigger signals with a delay set to 10ms
59. or moon pool installation Both transducer versions are described briefly in the appendix The figure below shows the transducer for pole nstalanons The length of the cable that connects the transducer to the electronic device is 30m for medium systems The weight and the dimensions depend on the used transducer frame and the system variant Typical values weight with 30m cable about 80 kg dimensions about 50cm x 12cm x 50cm WHD The cables are moulded non removable to the transducer General advice for the handling and installation of SES 2000 transducers is given in section 3 9 on page 33 For moon pool or hull mounted installations it is important to keep in mind that there has to be enough space behind the transducer to bend the cables The minimal bend radius of the transducer cable is 200mm There has to be water behind the transducer the sealing has to be made at the cables or standpipes have to be used There is an application note available summarizing the SES 2000 medium system s specials and discussing a possible rack installation of the electronic units AN 22 SES 2000 medium Sub bottom Profiler In this application note also the operation of the SES 2000 medium system without extension unit is discussed Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 27 3 6 SES 2000 deep 3 6 1 SES 2000 deep System Overview The following figure shows the SES 2000 deep system components Main system unit and extension unit
60. or used for the automatic range shift of the SES 2000 system This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally Analog Input For all systems it is possible to obtain the frequency band limited signal of the LF channel from an analog output connector Optionally an analog input connector is available to feed signals from external sources e g other receiver arrays or hydrophone streamers into the SES 2000 data acquisition unit Voltage and frequency limits are given in the specs This feature is included in the SES 2000 standard medium and deep systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally Side scan Extension For the SES 2000 compact light standard and medium systems there is a side scan extension 100 kHz available see section 3 8 on page 32 for details ISE Post processing Software For data post processing and interpretation of SES 2000 data there is a software package ISE available from INNOMAR see appendix A 4 on page 227 This software is included in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems For the SES 2000 compact and light systems it is available optionally SES Data Converter There is software available that converts SES 2000 binary data into data formats that can be used by third party post processing packages SES data can be converted into SEG Y XTF and ASCII data
61. previous shutdown call By calling shutdown a partial close of a socket is requested which is a signal that sending or receiving or both have been discontinued 10060 Connection timed out A connection attempt failed because the connected party did not properly respond after a period of time or the established connection failed because the connected host has failed to respond 10061 Connection refused No connection could be made because the target machine actively refused it This usually results from trying to connect to a service that is inactive on the foreign host that is one with no server application running Innomar Technologie GmbH 246 SES 2000 User s Guide 10064 Host is down A socket operation failed because the destination host is down A socket operation encountered a dead host Networking activity on the local host has not been initiated 10065 No route to host A socket operation was attempted to an unreachable host 10067 Too many processes A Windows Sockets implementation may have a limit on the number of applications that can use it Simultaneously 10091 Network subsystem is unavailable This error is returned by WSAStartup if the Windows Sockets implementation cannot function at this time because the underlying system it uses to provide network services is currently unavailable 10092 Winsock dll version out of range The current Windows Sockets implementation does not support the Windows Soc
62. primary range lf extended range is set to double the primary range the range is extended symmetrically above and below the primary range Data of both ranges are visible on screen in Split View mode if Dual Range is activated see figure below In this case only LF or HF data are shown not both as usually in Split View z te E mj A A z a a oe HF Depth 1 00 m Qe i Lim eee Gain Range Process Depth Threshold fam General Pnsssnnnnsnnnnnusunsnnnnnnnnnmn nna LF Frequency 12 kHz F High Energy Mode C E ES E 13m Pr Made extended primary range Multi R Mod BUN onwe Mere range Ruler values show So bee i caer 7 Allow High Pulse Rate primary range only Weep Sea Pulse Mode 14m F Burst Mode sis ms sig MAP SIST slate 153 ols lea SISE Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 75 To get proper range info on screen ruler lines and text should be switched on within the Options System Settings View dialog see section 5 10 4 on page 69 If range extension above primary range is not possible due to transducer depth extended range is shifted downwards as shown in the following two pictures Depth i Threshold General Transmit Gain e Process Length Auto Range Start use LF aterdepth Adjust Ping Rate 100 Ping Rate 8 42 pps Foot Print 3dB 0 2 m Foot Print GdB 0 3 m sis ms
63. pulses or bursts of sound pulses If the burst mode shall be used the duty cycle has to be set active time of total time frame in percent see section 6 4 on page 107 for details Burst mode has to be activated separately within the Transmit parameter menu see section 5 8 2 on page 59 Innomar Technologie GmbH 68 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 10 3 System Settings Files System Settings Ed In this dialog there are Mult Frequency Dual Range Side Scan settings for data recording View Marker Map Beam Steering system mode and data Record Path DA eal replay file mode System Synchronisation File Options File Mode File Mame Format DOMM r hhmmss Loop Files File Mame Prefix W Manual Replay Speed Use Area Line Name as File Prefix SI Store RAM Data during System Mode oe Create Record Log Record File Size Limited to 100k Pings per File f Based on File Size MByte 56 f Based on Time Minutes Record Path Select a directory where the recorded data shall be stored in system mode The chosen record path has to be valid and you have to have write permission To ensure best performance and data security data should be recorded on a local hard disk Do not use network locations or external USB hard drives for direct data recording Copy or move data after recording to a remote location if necessary File names are generated automatically see File Options below
64. requirements of your external device in the Options System Interfaces Output dialog Select the appropriate settings for the COM port data format depth output mode and for the separator characters required by your external device e The settings in the field Depth Output determine when the depth data string is transmitted If on new SIS data is checked changing SIS data GPS data must be recognized by the system Otherwise no data is fed to Depth OUT To output depth data anyway choose every second or continuously These settings should be used for testing the depth out interface e Check if depth data are sent by the Depth OUT port of the SES 2000 system by using an external PC notebook and a terminal program like Windows Hyper Terminal e To modify the settings of your external device refer to its manual System Interfaces SIS Baud Rate Data Bits f 4800 38400 E 9600 C 57600 oe set parameters for Cc 19200 115200 2 serial interface Data Format Output Yalues SES 96 iw Header iw SIS String P SIS Strings Ww Time Wo SIS Stringz FSIS String Depth Dutput Re eee lw HF Depth hw SIS Strings SIS String every second C onnen SIS data Drenth W SIS String J S15 Strings set when a string iS continuously M LF Frequency Hz M ASCII Data 4bit sent to the serial Separator Character HF Pule Length s D ASCII MAU Data interface f comma LF Pulses f space Sample String
65. s Guide A 1 5 SES 2000 ROV Transducer Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 207 A 2 SES 2000 Specifications A 2 1 SES 2000 compact Specifications SES 2000 compact Dimension and Weight e Main Unit 7 E Dimensions LxWxH 30 cm x 40 cm x 35 cm te Housing 19 inch 7U ER Weight about 23 kg Ai Tea Transducer Dimensions LxWxH 30 cm x 26 cm x 7 cm Weight incl 20m cable about 25 kg The transducer cable is moulded non removable to the transducer The cable length is fixed to 20m SES 2000 compact Technical Data Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver dimensions of active area about 0 2m x 0 2m half power beam width for transmission 1 8 Transmitter e primary frequency about 100kHz e secondary frequency 5 6 8 10 12 15kHz user adjustable e pulse width 66 500us user adjustable optionally up to 800us e transmission pulses CW Ricker e Transmitting channels 1 Electrical Pulse Power gt 12 kW Transmitting Sensitivity gt 236 dB uPa re 1m Heave Compensation yes depending on valid motion sensor data Roll Pitch Compensation and not available Pulse Repetition Rate lt 30 s up to 50 s with High Pulse Rate Module s i Deep Sea Pulse Mode Deep Sea Burst Mode up to 40m depends on sediment frequency noise level Multiple Target Resolution gt 5 cm depends on frequency and pulse length Accuracy 100 kHz 0 02 m 0 02 of w
66. s Guide 125 Margin Annotations The annotation strings printed into the echoprint margin repeat every 16 lines Printing of these values is switched on off within the Printer Options see above You can decide which information you want to print how often and in which order There are 16 drop down boxes corresponding to the 16 lines per cycle as shown in the left hand figure It is possible to print date and time PC clock and any SIS string defined in Options System Interfaces SIS see section 5 11 1 on page 77 Nothing will produce empty lines The value on the left will be printed into the lower margin and the value on the right into the upper margin see echoprint example above Time Date Setting up printer port and language SES Configuration It is possible to use printers connected to the parallel port LPT or the MS Windows fies lige ams fixed COM Ports Peace Port LPT1 default printer connected via USB port or C External PC selectable COM Ports C MS Windows Default Printer network The port has to be specified in COM Pott Settings Printer Port Settings the SES configuration tool see section SIS Interface Input Printer Port Address HEX 0378 4 2 2 on page 48 Depth Values Output External SIS Data Source Printer Interace f Parallel Printer Port LPT 1 CO MS Windows Default Printer Data Port High Speed Read from file es E Control Port COM Port Devices e g
67. section 5 11 7 on page 85 System Interfaces For UTM conversion third party software ProLat DLL Fosition Data Source Position Data Destination by Effective Objects is used SIS String Number for LON Position E SIS String Number for Position SIS String Number for LAT Position 2 N SIS Sting Murnber tor Y Positions E Conversion Settings Standard UTM Conversion User Defined Conversion ke Enable On line Conversion Input Format W G5 84 DOD DDDDDDD degrees only e g 12 422266 54 344266 Output Format Standard UTM Conversion G5 84 Sample Strings Position Input LOM 0 0000000 Position Output Rs Position Input LAT 0 0000000 Position Output tr Cancel 7 12 1 Position Data Source Destination You have to set the SIS string IDs for WGS84 position data longitude LON and latitude LAT values as defined in the Options System Interfaces SIS dialog see section 5 11 1 on page 77 East West and North South direction have to be specified separately Position Data Source Position Data Destination SIS String Number for LOM Position i JE SIS Sting Number fore Positions 7 SIS String Number for LAT Position 2 N SIS Sting Number tort Positions E The destination SIS string IDs have to be set as well The new calculated X and Y position values will replace any values that are stored at these IDs before Make sure not to overwrite any importa
68. source in case 7115557 oes of any problems with the system xxx SES 96 SES 2000 Host xxx f i os Y j gt Wind 2000 The help menu is accessible in file mode only cee Novara The information can be stored to a text file for future reference There is another log file generated automatically the sessys log located in the SESWIN folder This file contains information of each SESWIN start together with all error messages and is mainly intended for use by INNOMAR s technicians if you need assistance for troubleshooting For systems that are remote controlled via SESWIN s client server network connection there are two of these log files one the server and on the client computer that have to be taken into account for troubleshooting On the server PC there will be another log file called sesserv log in the SESWIN folder This file contains only messages regarding the SESWIN server Innomar Technologie GmbH 164 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 165 8 Maintenance and Error Handling In this chapter some problems are discussed which could occur while operating the system The hints should help you to solve these problems If you have other problems or questions please do not hesitate to contact INNOMAR directly or an authorised person Innomar Technologie GmbH Schutower Ringstr 4 D 18069 Rostock Germany E mail info innomar com Tel 49 381 44079 0
69. stable state has been achieved Pitch 0T if the MS LED in the status bar is green and motion sensor data Yaw 143 9 is displayed in the MS window A yellow LED indicates that are neadmg Mtaa data are received that are either marked unstable or not recog nized due to wrong interface settings General hints how to setup the motion sensor properly are given in section 8 7 on page 177 8 4 3 No stable data from the Motion Sensor In the MS window invalid data is shown for heave roll pitch yaw and heading The MS LED in the status bar is flickering e Check the settings in the Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor tab sheet e Check if the motion sensor is set to the right protocol and to the right parameters To do that the manufacturer s configuration utility should be used For further details refer to the motion sensor handbook General hints how to setup the motion sensor properly are given in section 8 7 on page 177 8 4 4 No incoming position data The GPS connector is plugged to the Navigation In socket but you can t see any position data in the small SIS window tab sheet on the left hand bottom corner on the screen e Check if your GPS receiver is switched on e Check the SIS settings made in Options System Interfaces SIS e Check if data is received by the system Options SIS Monitor Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 173 8 5 SESWIN functions s
70. system Every coordinate system requires proj and either datum or ellpse Most projections use lon_0 for the central meridian and lat_0 for the central parallel All Cartesian projections allow x_0 and y_0 to provide false easting and northing Below an example is given for a parameter file that may be used in Germany German Chart Datum VILLI Pl lr birt L IMPORTANT USIP isi rire values for translation has to be to WGS84 but values for rotation and scale have to be from WGS to local datum it S42 83 DE Neue Laender 2001 1m lt 1001 gt proj tmerc lon_O 12 lat_0O 0O k 1 0 x_0 4500000 y_0 0 ellps krass TEOWG S64 24 297 126 4 0 9327 02 063 0 4247 0 041 1 01 ina ts m tno ders lt gt lt 1002 gt proj tmerc lon_O 15 lat_0O O k 1 0 x_0 5500000 y_0 0 ellps krass PLOWS 04 7 a Oy 1 2640 p 935 27 0 30639 0424 7 0204 Hl 4unwesa m tno des x gt DHDN PD Alte Laender Nord 1m lt 1003 gt proj tmerc lon_O 6 lat_O 0 k 1 0 x_0 2500000 y_0O 0 ellps bessel TCOWGS O4 0 9045 P0009 aLL 6p HOw 196700052 32 560 1 0 299 Anes nO ders lt gt lt 1004 gt proj tmerc lon_O 9 lat_O 0 k 1 0 x_0 3500000 y_0O 0 ellps bessel TLOWwSo4 000 07 008 Oya LO p06 1967 0092 ye OU ae ZOO Fanat am no ders lt gt lt 1005 gt proj tmerc lon_O 12 lat_0O O k 1 0 x_0 4500000 y_0 0 ellps bessel FCOWDS 04 090 45 769497411 2670 01 96750 052 7 500 Ly H8 299 Sun SS m tno def lt
71. that may show up in the messages tab of the SESWIN network window are listed in appendix A 8 on page 243 e The system will respond to commands not as fast as during direct operation due to network delays Therefore KVM extension should be the preferred solution for remote control Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 159 7 17 How to transfer SES 2000 SBP data to another computer All data are recorded digitally on hard disk on the system control computer This is in the main unit for most SES 2000 systems but an external PC or laptop computer for the SES 2000 compact system Data may be transferred to another computer by e using USB storage device hard disk or thumb drive or e local area network connection USB connectors Network LAN connector There are also some older systems with removable disk that may be used for data transfer 7 17 1 Data transfer via USB storage device The easiest way to transfer data to another computer is to use an USB storage device like hard disk thumb drive or DVD writer to save the data from the SES 2000 main unit Some older SES 96 SES 2000 systems weren t equipped with USB connectors On these systems a LAN connector is available and you can set up a LAN connection to another computer see next section Please note Do not record data directly on USB storage devices This may result in loss of data Innomar Technologie GmbH 160 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 17 2 Dat
72. the file names during the recording The file name is created using the current date and time PC clock according to the pattern chosen in the SESWIN main menu Options System Settings Files see section 5 10 3 on page 68 If a specific file size is exceeded a new file will be created automatically The SES 2000 data are recorded in a binary format They can be replayed by the SESWIN software ses files only and processed by the ISE Post Processing software package Optionally a converter is available from INNOMAR to export SES data files ses and or raw to SEG Y or XTF format With the ISE Post Processing software it is possible to combine data files to larger ones or to split long files in shorter ones gt Do not edit SES 2000 data files manually because this can cause fatal errors during further processing 5 17 2 SES 2000 Record Log File Format There will be a logging file created by the SES for Windows software if the appropriate option is enabled SESWIN main menu Options System Settings Files The file name is fixed with sesrec log and is located in the SES for Windows program directory It contains a list of all recorded profiles with their main parameters The data format is of ASCII type The structure of the file is the following Date Time Profile Area Frequency Pulses Range Range p 160700 e2250 5 Space characters separate the fields It is possible to use this file for reporti
73. the quality of measurement results within the SESWIN software Some methods are described here 9 6 1 Signal Stacking Smoothing The signal to noise ratio SNR of the received echo Transmitter Bottom echo signals can be improved by stacking and or smooth ing If one adds a number of echo signals the correla ted signals echoes from the seafloor and sediment layers are enhanced while uncorrelated signals noise will be reduced If n echo signals are summed up the SNR increases by a factor of up tov Layer echos Output of accumulator Stacking There are n consecutive echo signals added up to calculate one new signal with enhanced SNR to be displayed Then the original signals will be discarded and the next n received echo signals are used to calculate a second signal to be displayed Thus not only the SNR is enhanced there is also a data reduction compression of the resulting echo print The reduced amount of data is useful if the ping rate is very high and the survey is not aimed to find very small features in the sub seafloor If the main task is searching small objects like pipes stacking should be set to a very low value 1 or 2 x Echo 1 y Echo 2 Smoothing There are n consecutive echo signals added up to calculate one new signal with enhanced SNR to be displayed Then the oldest original signal will be discarded and the next received echo signal is used with the remaining previously received signals to calcul
74. the supported data formats is given in the Sensor Data Format box and in the appendix of this manual Please contact INNOMAR if you want to use other motion sensors in order to realize the interfaces Heave Correction Compensation OFF no heave compensation of the displayed data but the data from the motion sensor will be stored together with the echo data Compensation ON the echo data will be heave corrected displayed and printed but both the echo data and the data from the motion sensor will be stored separately Curve plot overlay The heave motion will be shown on the display and on the printer as a line curve in the echoprint In this case heave compensation does not take place Invert Heave Sign invert sign of the incoming heave values Ignore Instable Flag if checked all motion sensor values are recorded and used even if the motion sensor signalises that the data sent is maybe incorrect Usually only stable data should be used If checked the motion sensor LED in the SESWIN status bar is encircled yellow to indicate this potentially dangerous setting SESWIN 1 7 2 or higher Delay can be used to compensate a delay between motion sensor data and echo data Usually the most recent motion sensor data delay 0 are used for heave compensation Filter can be used to discard all motion sensor heave values outside a given range Roll Pitch Correction Switch on off beam stabilization If checked the incoming
75. transducer There are 6 M8 bolts to fix the transducer at the ship s hull y Y 55 230 Plug connector a p gt 295 E p Cable length 20m or 30m diameter 20mm 295 p gt 150 Tn p gt plug 130 a p gt 256 The arrow indicates forward direction for correct beam steering Innomar Technologie GmbH 202 SES 2000 User s Guide A 1 2 Transducer Mounting Bracket Option There is a mounting bracket available to install SES 2000 compact light standard transducers temporarly on small ships over the side by using a pole see figures below Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide A 1 3 SES 2000 medium Transducer Transducer for pole and moon pool installation There are 3 cables going from the transducer to the electronic boxes The cables cannot be detached from the transducer cable length 30m cable diameter 20mm cable bend radius min 200mm plug diameter 55mm There are six M10 bolts to fix the transducer at the ship s hull The transducer can be used for moon pool installations without noses or for over the side mounting with nose 190 76 M10 x 30 Plug connector 3 3 Cables 390 470 203 removable nose 76 485 The arrow indicates forward direction for correct beam steering Please note that for transducers manufactured before June 2008 the M10 bolts were pl
76. water depth is shown in section 7 13 4 on page 146 Innomar Technologie GmbH 144 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 13 3 Running the SES 2000 triggering a Multi Beam System In deeper water the SES 2000 ping rate will decrease dramatically if the system is triggered by a MBES Therefore the SES 2000 SBP should run as masier and trigger the MBES How to set up this configuration is exemplified by the Kongsberg EM710 MBES in this subsection Connecting Trigger Lines The trigger output of the SES 2000 SBP Trigger OUT BNC connector at the front panel has to be connected to the trigger input of the MBES For synchronizing with other acoustic equipment the Kongsberg EM710 MBES can use three signals e Trig Out TTL 5V 25mA low during EM710 transmit pulse e Trig IN CTS RS232 High 3 5V Low 3 15V change to high by external device will initiate a new EM710 ping has to be set back to low by external device e RIS RS232 High 3 45V Low 3 15V high if EM710 is ready for new ping low if EM710 busy has to be monitored by external device RATS o Soo LL CTS TrigOut These signals are available at a 9 pin SUB D connector at the rear panel of the EM710 with the following pin assign ment pinno description 1 Trigger OUT TTL Trigger GND Remote on off 24V GND RTS Ready for new trigger CTS Trigger IN not used It is not necessary to use all 3 lines For p
77. waveform for the selected range Digitisation 16 bit 96KHz for full waveform data poe torenetapo cata sample rate depending on selected ranae Signal Processing bandpass filters adjusted automatically according to transmission pulse characteristics noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing DSP for improved resolution and penetration into sediment e g matched filtering and spike removal heave compensation and swell filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoprints replay of previously recorded files Data Output on line recording of envelope and full waveform data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters and navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print integrated TFT Display external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format network LAN output of echoprint data and auxiliary data for HYPACK integration or additional monitoring Data Input Serial RS232 or network input for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format Serial RS232 input for motion sensor data used for heave and roll pitch compensation Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input Control Unit state of the art integrated PC MS WINDOWS XP professional operating system Power Supply Requirements e 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz e power consumption lt 900 W e power on current surg
78. will only affect the data Range Process display and the printed record Stacking 2 i eee Stacking is used to improve the signal to noise ratio and to reduce ITono dco oo DoE the amount of data to be displayed and printed range 1 16 steps Smoothing 3 1 2 A good starting point would be a rate of 2 to 3 ee P TETES EETEREEEE Smoothing calculates a moving average of consecutive pings to Soft TYG dBm Oe improve the signal to noise ratio range 1 16 steps 1 2 ru A disadvantage is that if a high smoothing value is used the old Pivvevcccecrscranies 1 pings have a blurring effect on the data Usually values of 2 or 3 are C LF Depth for TVG appropriate Normalize Gain C Reduce Noise Stacking and smoothing are detailed in section 9 6 on page 192 We Median Filter M Swell Filter 10 Soft TVG time variant gain amplifies the digitized signal starting at the calculated water depth with an adjustable gain range 0 10dB m steps 0 1 0 5 dB m It should generally be kept low typically 0 2 or 0 4 dB m LF Depth for TVG If no reliable water depth values from the HF channel data can be obtained e g in deep water areas it is possible to use the water depth values from the LF channel for TVG Normalize Gain f checked the signal attenuation caused by absorption and diffraction of the sound beam will be compensated according to the water depth Reduce Noise f checked a digital filter is used to
79. you want to print your online calculated echo prints during the survey you have to connect a printer to your computer You can also connect it while the system software is running The status of the printer is shown in the status bar of the SESWIN software The printer output has to be configured within the SESWIN software see section 5 11 6 on page 84 For on line echogram printouts only a limited number of printer models can be used see appendix A 5 on page 229 GND Connector The SES 2000 system has a female banana ground connector to apply a separate ground connection to the transducer Depending on the power supply on board of the vessel sometimes disturbances noise occurring in the receiving signal can be reduced by the additional GND connection Innomar Technologie GmbH 42 SES 2000 User s Guide Analogue Out Analogue In Analog OUT The Analogue Output BNC is the output of the band limited LF signal iii secondary frequency The centre frequency and bandwidth of the signal is set according to the chosen transmission pulse frequency and pulse length The voltage range of the analogue output signals is 10V He 1 al rt a T foo s aris ERAT tee DEEN JSA wi ays gt fs A ha ae f ee a ee ae The optional Analogue Input BNC can be used to feed signals from other sources to the SES 2000 system The input signal must be in an amplitude range of 5V The bandwidth for the signal analysis is 2 22 kHz
80. 00 Users Guide SSCS 7 2 How to install the SES 2000 ROV transducer General hints about transducer mounting are given in 3 10 on page 34 and in section 7 1 on page 109 This section deals with some special remarks regarding the installation of SES 2000 ROV transducers 7 2 1 SES 2000 ROV transducer The SES 2000 ROV transducer is pres sure proof for operating depths up to 1000m or 2000m depending on version The figure shows a sketch of the trans ducer with the most important dimen sions Detailed technical drawings of the transducer are available on request The arrow in the sketch and photograph indicate forward direction for transducer mounting The cable has to be laced onto the cable support as shown in the figures During transport and installation the transducer s active area should be protected against mechanical damages Connectors have to be protected by dummy plugs if not in use 7 2 2 Mounting the transducer onto the ROV frame The transducer should be mounted to the ROV frame using rubber washers and rubber tubes as provided by INNOMAR to avoid any direct metal metal connection If M8 bolts are used rubber tubes will fit into the 12mm holes of the transducer flange to isolate the bolts see figure below a F bolt and nut 8mm rubber tube transducer flange rubber washer ROV frame washer SES 2000 ROV transducer mounted using rubber to avoid any metal metal connection Innomar Technologie Gmb
81. 000 systems is low enough to penetrate the seafloor The reflected primary frequency signals about 35 kHz for the SES 2000 deep and about 100 kHz for the other SES 2000 systems can be used for exact determination of water depth even in difficult situations e g soft sediments on top of the seafloor The generated difference frequency signal has some advantageous properties compared to conventional by linear acoustics generated signals that will be discussed in detail in the next subsection 9 4 2 Advantages of Nonlinear Parametric Sub bottom Profilers Using nonlinear acoustics for sub bottom profiling gives the following advantages compared to linear sound generation e Itis possible to generate narrow sound beams at low frequencies with small and portable transducers The half power beam width is nearly independent of the sound wave frequency e The directivity of the difference frequency has virtually no side lobes during transmission e Short signals without significant ringing effects can be transmitted e Anarrow beam without side lobes as well as short pulses results in less volume and bottom reverberation and increases the achievable signal to noise ratio for the detection of weak reflectors e High penetration and excellent resolutions in both the horizontal and vertical direction are possible due to transmission of short low frequent pulses Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 187 There is one m
82. 1 The warning colour will be yellow if there is data coming in but is not recognised The colour will be red if there is no incoming data Innomar Technologie GmbH 58 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 8 Parameter Menu Control Parameters SES for Windows Program Options Help Gain Range Process General Transmit PEPPER LF Frequency 6 kHz eee eee High Energy Mode Muki Frequency Mode Beam Steering Mode Allow High Pulse Rate Deep Sea Pulse Mode ws sis ms SIG MAP r k EPET A A ene Range 125m 150m LF 27 08 2007 11 23 38 EXT a Options parameters and values selected in the parameter menu directly control the quality of the data collected and displayed A changed parameter is sent to the hardware system and takes effect at once The Parameter menu described in this section is visible only if the Quick Controls button is not pressed Otherwise a reduced menu is available providing quick access to all parameters that have to be changed during data acquisition see section 5 9 on page 65 Since some parameters depend on each other limits for the avai lable ranges are sometimes not static but set by the software to en sure a reliable operation of the SES 2000 system To change the parameters a mouse or trackball can be used or you can use the following keys on the keyboard e The focus can be set from one tab to the other by Ctrl TAB or Shift Ctr
83. 10 seconds to go by and switch both on again Run sesconfig exe If sesconfig exe detects the High Speed Comm Port only do this 1 Make a note which port has been detected Exit sesconfig exe and try again 2 If that did not solve the problem activate the Device Manager and find out which additional COMM ports have been established after the USB cable has been plugged in One of them is the High Speed Comm Port that has been detected by sesconfig exe before The other one is the Control Comm Port Exit the Device Manager and run sesconfig exe Set the Control Comm Port manually and exit sesconfig exe by clicking at the OK button Both ports are stored and there is no need to invoke sesconfig exe again 8 2 2 The Comm Port number for SESWIN 2000 Compact is too high and cannot be set by sesconfig exe Sesconfig exe supports detection of comm ports 1 to 32 When the USB port has been used with other devices for instance a memory stick and is connected to SESWIN 2000 Compact afterwards Windows most likely creates different comm ports There are 2 ways to solve the problem 1 Start the system again and see whether Windows creates comm ports within the range 1 8 To check that either run sesconfig exe and let it detect the ports or run the Device Manager and have a look at the existing comm ports 2 Run the Device Manager and modify the comm port numbers that are higher than 8 toa number within the range 1 to 8 Make sure the same number
84. 101 3200 0000 connector at pressure vessel Pressure cap for transducer 1 Burton 5101 3200 0000 connector at transducer Pressure cap for power data 3 Burton 5101 2000 0000 service connectors These caps shouldn t be used during diving use dummy plugs instead Although these caps should be pressure proof customers reported damages after using these caps during dives Dust Caps for Connectors and Cables hard rubber Description Qty Manufacturer Part number Dust cap for transducer 1 Burton 6700 0520 0000 connector at pressure vessel Dust cap for transducer 1 Burton 6700 0124 0321 connector at transducer Dust cap for power data service 3 Burton 6700 0124 0201 connectors Dust cap for power and network 2 Burton 6700 0125 0201 cable connectors Dust cap for transducer cable 2 Burton 6700 0125 0321 connectors The use of dust caps will keep the connectors clean and help prevent accidental damage both during storage and service Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 223 A 3 SES 2000 Options There are several options available for the SES 2000 sub bottom profilers These options are summarized in this appendix Multi Frequency Signals With this option it is possible to transmit consecutive pings with two or three different Secondary centre frequencies That is useful if you are unsure about the optimal frequency settings or if data from a wide frequency range is required
85. 2 38 EXT 4 PAN no paper Buf O Page 0 HO 5447MB MS no data SIS no data E MCP no data ee sis MMS dataok is ve Green received data OK Pitch 0 1 Yellow received data are flagged instable by the sensor Yaw 1430 Warning and will not be used Heading 143 9 Rea no data received or no motion sensor connected It is possible to ignore the instable condition flag set by the sensor by checking the related check box in the Main Menu Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor dialog Be aware by doing this maybe faulty motion sensor data will be used To indicate this the motion sensor LED in the SESWIN status bar is encircled yellow if ignore instable flag is checked SESWIN 1 7 2 or higher To check the mounting orientation you can perform the following motions with the sensor and observe the changed data in the MS window in the SESWIN screen e lift the sensor heave value goes negative e tilt to starboard right looking forward roll value goes positive and increases e tilt backwards transducer goes bow up pitch value goes positive and increases If the heave goes into the wrong direction the heave sign can be changed within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor see section 5 11 4 on page 82 nn InnomarTechnologieGmbH s ses sSsSS SES 2000 User s Guide 115 7 4 How to setup the SES 2000 compact USB dev
86. 2000 standard Transducer The length of the cable that connects the transducer to the main unit is 30m The weight and the dimensions depend on the used transducer frame Typical values weight with 30m cable about 30kg dimensions about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm WHD The cable is moulded non removable to the transducer General advice for the handling and installation of SES 2000 transducers is given in section 3 9 on page 33 Innomar Technologie GmbH 3 5 SES 2000 medium 3 5 1 SES 2000 medium System Overview The following figure shows the SES 2000 medium system components e Main system unit and extension unit containing transmitters receivers amplifiers e Transducer array used to transmit and receive the signals cable length 30m e Receiver array optional SES 2000 medium AR cable length 30m e Workstation optional to remote control the system via network LAN g 2 units to be put close together interconnections lt 2m Workstation _ _ eee eee eae M Network 3 Transducer Cables VA OON ze AOE l h i ony 7 length lt 100m Transducer Array l optional Receiver Array aagal The technical specs including dimensions and weight of the system components and sketches of the transducer are given in the appendix 3 5 2 SES 2000 medium Main Unit se Floppy Disk bitin USB ports 10 4 TFT Display PC network Navigation Input Video Output Motion sensor
87. 22 SES 2000 l0Nt SPSCIIC ANIONS eriin ea lien tears en ddeawinntetalediates 209 A 2 3 SES 2000 standard Specifications ccccccssseccccceseeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeseegeeeeseageeeeseas 211 A 2 4 SES 2000 medium Specifications ce ccccceeccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeesaaees 213 A25 Oo 2000 ASCEND SDSCIICAIIONS 5 aisietitasiat terse a tesa Greats denen ed eieaae ah 215 A 2 7 SES 2000 ROV Specifications cccccccccccseseceeceeseceeceeeeeeseaeeeeesseeeeesseeeessaeaes 219 A289 ES c 000 COHOMS sinai E Gaxaeadeeaaes 223 A 4 ISE Post Processing Software cccccscccsseeccseeceeeeeceeesseeeeeeees 227 A 5 Supported Motion Sensors and Printers ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 AG Molon SENS OF FOUSING asarrean 231 AT GPS NMEA SCHICNCES ser E 233 A 8 Motion Sensor Data Format ccccccceeceseeeteeeeeeeeeeneeseeeseneeaees 23 AS TORIPE GOGES wiiticcnnstaratniediacacuaarsandislesucietiaumacieanauntantamnnsesa 243 Innomar Technologie GmbH 200 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 201 A 1 SES 2000 Transducers A 1 1 SES 2000 compact light standard Transducer A cable length 20m compact light A 30m standard cable diameter about 20mm cable bend radius min 200mm plug diameter about 55mm O ar cag The cable cannot be detached from the
88. 38 EXT FAN no paper Buk 0 Page 0 HD S447ME MS no data 515 no data lEt MCF no data Echo plot display Online output of calculated echogram Scrolling speed depends on the range settings the resulting ping rate and process parameters Depth display Display of water depth measured by HF channel Monitoring SIS Display of navigation data Windows MS Display of motion sensor data Signal Display of echo envelope MAP Display of track plot Level display Displays signal amplitude of LF and HF channel Depth ruler A depth scale is displayed The depth values are calculated based on a given constant sound velocity Parameter menu Setting of hardware parameters e g choosing frequency and pulse length setting the amplifiers Status bar Display of essential system settings and status display for the system Main menu System configuration interface configuration help pull down menus Button bar Setting of most important features for system mode Hotkeys e g switching on off transmitting data recording printing Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 2 SESWIN Main Menu SES for Windows Program Options Help HF Depth 1 00 m 5 2 1 Program Menu Options Help File Browser and File Cutter are file handling tools that File Browser are only available in file mode They are described in detail File Cutter in section 5 14 on page 93 Capture Window Strg Capture Window creates a screen shot of the
89. 4 z w a 694 666 2095 a a 3696 AAA 3697 00A Sa Range 300m 330m LF Freg 15kHz LF Pulses 3 Profile 72 File 3 of 12MB 15 01 2008 22 50 47 INT 4 PRN no paper But 0 Page 0 HD 9791ME M5 from file SIS from file MCP from file Tim Innomar Technologie GmbH 130 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 10 5 How to set markers when crossing predefined survey lines For this marker type you have to specify the position Position Data Source data source SIS fields containing the X and Y E E position Optionally all position values that are zero may be excluded from the processing SIS String Number fort Positions SIS ID for Fis Marker SIS ID for KF Marker SIS ID for optional 2nd Label W Exclude ero Values If cross line markers are to be drawn you have to define or load a list with position information of specified lines which may cross the actual survey profiles see figure below The same system of coordinates and units has to be used as used by the SIS strings defined above At any position where these lines are crossed a marker will be drawn into the echo plot labelled with the Cross Line Name given in the list The marker function can be enabled or disabled within this dialog There are three buttons available for loading saving and clearing the whole table Cross Lines Cross Line Definitions Name 100 00 100 00 100 00 2000 00 crozs_ 100 00 200 00 2000 00 cross 2 100 00 300
90. 5E5 10 51 08 2 45 2 60 5197 5152 5153 5154 Cancel Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 175 8 6 Signal detection problems 8 6 1 No seafloor on the screen The system is running transmitters are switched on but there is no echo on the screen representing the seafloor e One reason for that might be that the range and or the range start have been set improperly Modify the range settings Choose at first a longer range to find the seafloor and decrease the range then to the interesting length Often it is better to look for the bottom signal in the HF channel at first e The gain might be too low Modify the gain settings or use the AGC function automatic gain control 8 6 2 The echo signal is too small If the received signal is too small there are several possibilities Weak bottom material mud lf there is a layer of mud or fluid mud the LF bottom signal is very weak Check the amplifier settings and look at the HF channel if you can get there a better seafloor signal Survey areas with steep slopes If you are working in an area with steep slopes of the bottom you can have small signals from the sea bottom due to the narrow sound beam Use the AGC function in such areas while operating in a long range Dirty water dredging activities You are working in an area with very dirty water for instance during dredging activities Such conditions cause a very bad signal to noise ratio and you will get a hi
91. 5kHz 1cycle for most systems Due to the extremely high transducer bandwidth the sound pulses show nearly no ringing effects at their trailing ends This is illustrated in the figure Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 191 9 5 4 Ping Rate The SES 2000 sub bottom profilers can transmit up to 30 pings per second to ensure the best possible horizontal resolution In very shallow water even 50pps are possible with the optional module High Pulse Rate The achievable ping rate mainly depends on the range In shallow water SBPs usually wait for the received signal before transmitting the next ping This would reduce the ping rate dra matically in deep water areas Therefore SES 2000 SBPs feature a so called Deep Sea Pulse Mode If not the entire range is of interest e g water column for most SBP applica tions sound pings can be transmitted more often In this transmit regime pulse rate depends on sampling range the range visible in the echoprint related to the range start roughly the water depth see figure below There is also a burst mode available that should be used if synchronization with other acous tic equipment like multi beam echo sounders is required without reducing the ping rate In that mode there is a user defined period there the SES system is not
92. 7002270 39 21 12 2008 20 53 04 8 68080 369 71 6 14 4 52 SET SkH2 2pulses R tart 14m RLength 15m EOL 21 12 2008 21 65 25 Profile 1 Area SIS 942619 53 7862348 31 21 12 2008 21 05 25 6 680608 369 71 8 88 6 61 SET SkH2 2pulses RStart 14m RLength 15m Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 163 To get this log file you have to activate logging within the Options System settings window System Settings Record Path D T File Options File Mode File Name Format DOMM r Yhhmmss Loop Files File Hame Prefix iw Manual Replay Speed Use Area Line Name as File Pretix Store RAW Data during System Mode W Create Record Log Record File Size Limited to 100k Pings per File f Based on File Size MByte 56 f Based on Time Minutes Cancel Profile lists can also be generated in post processing using INNOMAR s ISE software 7 18 3 System information and LOG files for troubleshooting System Info System Information Date amp Time 22 06 2007 14 09 33 SES 96 SES 2000 System There is a System Information box about the gt comnpact hardware and software releases and serial numbers re and about the implementation of special options as I TE 6 well as about the host software releases ist 4 5 6 B 10 1 gt Ha The actual status of the operating system is also yes yes listed 7 yes i gt H This window is a valuable information
93. 9 LF Channel F7 If the LF channe button is set the LF signals will be printed and shown on the display In any case both channels HF and LF will be recorded With the optional system hotkey CHN you can toggle between the HF and LF channel 5 3 10 HF Channel F7 If the HF channel button is set the HF signals will be printed and shown on the display In any case both channels HF and LF will be recorded With the optional system hotkey CHN you can toggle between the HF and LF channel 5 3 11 Split View F9 If SolitView is activated HF and LF data are displayed simultaneously on the screen The echogram displayed on the right side of the screen corresponds to the channel activated by the buttons LF Channel or HF Channel The other channel is displayed on the left side of the screen In Beam Steering Mode the echoprints of the first three beam angles as defined in Main Menu Options System Settings Beam Steering are displayed on the screen corresponding to the channel activated by the buttons LF Channel or HF Channel The signals from Angle 1 are shown in the right window from Angle 2 in the centre window and from Angle 3 in the left window 5 3 12 Echoprint Mode F10 For processing the echo data there are two display modes available see section 9 6 on page 192 Clicking this button toggles the display between colour coded envelope of the received echo Amplitude and changes in the a
94. 9 dB Gain settings are final and directly affect data quality For some SES 2000 systems there are other gain ranges or steps Two displays can assist you to find the best gain settings the Signal Monitoring Window and the Level Display see also section 5 8 3 on page 61 sis ms SIG MAP LF mm z A LF ma aa a aaoo ue oO LF s0d amp HF dE Range Start 125 ro Area Range Start defines the start depth of the displayed echoprint and the recorded data steps 1 10 m This can be changed at any Protile time Range changes are final and directly affect recorded data Apply New Profile see also section 5 8 4 on page 62 Area is a short text annotation that may be changed for every runline Changes take effect after pressing the Apply New Profile SIS ms sig MAP SIS button SIS2 SIS S154 The Profile box can be changed with each survey line this may SIS5 be useful during a grid survey Range 1 999 Changes take Slb effect after pressing the Apply New Profile button Range 125m 150r U6 U5 20U5 115 Esl The Apply New Profile button flashes if Area or Profile values were changed The new information becomes valid after pressing this button The next run line can therefore be prepared during a present survey line and then applied just before the start of the new line Innomar Technologie GmbH 66 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 10 SESWIN System Set
95. 9MB Echoprint structure There are 3 areas onthe plot as shown oo fabiifiii tiifiihiiiiiiiii in the figure i i i En Nina OL e Page Header 1 showing some Bi m a general information regarding the EFEN profile data acquisition and signal processing e Margins 2 showing information as 223 Q MN i i ka aooo Nt LLT oe set up in the printer options IEA ms oe see below re yay e Echo Plot 3 Echoprint setup Before starting printing some settings have to be made in the Options System Interfaces Printer see section 5 11 6 on page 84 In this dialog you have to System Interfaces choose the printer model and to set the values to be order Gace T E printed in the margins as fetiltme Dae S Mea Tm Dae F High Print Quality at File Mode shown above No 2 Range No10 sist sis2 gt T a oe In the printer options you No 3 SIS1 SIS2 No11 5153 5154 gt SESE can switch on off printing of No4 553 5154 v No12 Time Date ee PCL3 fas the page header and the C Buo oe f Hewlett Packard PEL 5 margins SIS data as shown C EPC 1086 Family in the echoprint above In file SUL ER aac mode you may also switch Z 551 552 No 15 SIS3 SIS4 C ULTRA 120 on High Print Quality This No amp SIS3 SIS4 No 16 SIS 5 515 6 option slows down printing substantially and is therefore not available in system mode Cancel Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User
96. CL5 printer language e EPC1086 EPC8300 thermal printers www epclabs com e ULTRA 120 thermal printers Innomar Technologie GmbH 230 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide SS O O A 6 Motion Sensor Housing INNOMAR provides an outdoor housing for the MRU Z motion sensor This housing is described below MRU Housing INNOMAR s motion sensor housing is intended to protect the MRU placed outdoor e g on deck it must not be installed under water The housing has no depth rating length ca 230mm diameter ca 115mm connector 9 pin SUBCONN degree of protection IP 65 material Stainless steel There is a mounting bracket with 4 holes placed on the motion sensor housing to ease the mounting near the transducer MRU Z mounting bracket 9 pin SUBCONN connector Innomar Technologie GmbH 232 SES 2000 User s Guide MRU Cable and Connectors gt ae ee a a gi The housing s 9 pin SUBCONN connector is internally wired to the MRU connector There is a cable with two 9 pin SUB D RS232 connec tors for data interface and two banana plugs for power supply ae 9 pin SUBCONN connector SUB D to SES 2000 MRU input SUB D to GPS receiver see below banana plugs from power supply MRU Z Housing SUB D Signal Remarks R 1 red power supply 12V B 2 black power supply GND C 3 MRU 2 MRU Tx PC Rx1 S 4 MRU3 MRU Rx PC Tx1 The housina s Oni
97. Close to the transducer the sound pressure is irregular and shows a lot of local minima and maxima This region is called near field or Fresnel zone At a larger distance from the transducer the sound wave is spherical and the amplitude de creases with increasing distance There is a certain pattern in the sound pressure visible a mainlobe and different sidelobes can be distinguished This so called beam pattern and its characteristic values are discussed later This region is called far field or Fraunhofer zone There is a transition zone between near and far field 350 400 450 Z cm 500 Near field Far field IP P o 2 0 Transducer 20cm x 20cm Frequency 100kHz 450 Z cm 500 Because of the irregular sound pressure distribution in the near field transducer characteristics are given only for the far field Working within the near filed is almost impossible The near field length can be determined by the last local maximum of the sound pressure obtained at the acoustic axis of the transducer as shown in the picture above There is also a geometrical approach to determine the near field length or diffraction length ly the crossing of the transducer dimensions and the aperture angle For circular transducers both values are the same for rectangular transducer there is a small difference as shown in the figure above For the near field length the following general relations can be ob
98. EA command structure INCMD command parameter lt CR LF gt switch transmitter on SNDON switch printer on PRNON change frequency downwards FRQDOWN change pulbeength upwards se change pulse length downwards PLSDOWN J change CF gain upwards EFGUR change UF gain downwards LFGDOWN o change HF gain upwards change HF gain downwards HEGDOWN set HF gain HF gain in dB rare range stat upwards YRSTUP O change range sartdownwards RSTDOWN oS range rangeTength upwards REND ehange range length downwards RINDOWN oS change profile counter upwards YONTUR OOOO O range profile counter downwards CNTOOWN SSS Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 155 7 16 2 Operating the SES 2000 system via KVM extender Using a KVM extender is the easiest way to operate SES 2000 sub bottom profilers fully remote controlled There is no other computer required and no additional delay if system parameters have to be changed KVM extension should hence be the preferred solution if remote operation is required There are KVM extenders on the market allowing a distance of several hundred meters see figure below KVM switches can be used to control different computers by one set of key board mouse and video Such devices are often used to switch between different systems that are not operated simultaneously to SES 2000 network cable to remote console Innomar Technologie GmbH 156 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 16 3 Oper
99. ES Data Acquisition Range e al The effective swath is increased as well if the MBES is tilted e g in dual head configurations Delay and burst settings are made in the External Trigger Settings within the Options System Synchronisation tab see figure Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pe Delay as percentage of range Reweting Vitae Number of pings for one sync pulse Please note that the delay can be given absolutely in microseconds and or relative to range Both values will be added to get the total delay There will be an additional delay of about 1ms for external trigger applied by the system see section 6 2 2 on page 101 for details Absolute time based delay is useful if transducer altitude above seafloor will not change during the survey like in ROV applications In this case the interference caused by the SBP will be placed at a determined MBES range Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 143 The range related setting will automatically adapt the delay according to changed water depth In this case the interference will be in a constant distance to the MBES seafloor Please note that range related trigger delay is given relative to the range centre In the example given above range is 80 140m range centre is 110m and 80ms 60m delay equal 55 of range To get two SBP pings within one MBES cycle set number of p
100. Fax 49 381 44079 299 Please check this chapter for any hints regarding your problem before contacting INNOMAR In any case you should reboot the system and see if the problem persists For this reboot you should power off the system for at least 1 minute a simple Windows restart is sometimes not sufficient For the SES 2000 ROV pressure bottle you have to wait at least 6 minutes before re power the system because otherwise the internal online UPS may prevent a proper restart In case you need assistance from INNOMAR you should have the following information available e serial number of your system last two parts a two digit number and a letter is sufficient e information obtained from SESWIN Main Menu Help System Info available in File Mode only e logfile sessys log located in the SESWIN folder Application Dir in the above mentioned System Information e for remote controlled systems using the SESWIN server client network connection also the sessys log and sesserv log files from the server computer should be available Please follow the instructions given in section 7 18 on page 162 to obtain the requested information Innomar Technologie GmbH 166 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 1 Hardware Handling and Maintenance There is no specific maintenance schedule for the SES 2000 system components To keep the system in good state you should follow the instructions in this section 8 1 1 Transducer Please
101. File Options File Name Format Here you can select a pattern how the SESWIN software creates new file names using the current date and time File Name Prefix It is possible to define a prefix that will be used for any filename created Use Area as File Prefix check this if the file name should start with the area name set in the SESWIN Parameter menu General Store RAW Data If checked the raw data full waveform of the received signal will be recorded during data acquisition additionally to the normal SES data envelope files Full waveform data cannot be recorded using SES 2000 compact systems Create Record Log If activated a log file sesrec log will be created and every data record start stop will be logged with date time profile number area LF frequency kHz LF pulses range start range length If the multi frequency mode is active the frequency combination will be logged as well Record File Size Determines the maximum size of a data file based either on file size specified in MBytes or on time If a data file reaches the limit a new data file is automatically started Please note that a new file will be started at midnight automatically regardless of the limits File Mode The following settings are only for file mode data replay Loop Files f checked a file that is displayed in file mode runs forever Manual Replay Speed If checked the echogram scroll speed in file mode can be set using the slider belo
102. Gain The chosen gain is okay if the red LEDs of the HF and LF channel flash only occasionally The two single LEDs on the right side are indicating the amplification of the raw and unfiltered signal and are used to indicate an amplifier overload Red colour should be avoided for these LEDs ie 5 5 SESWIN Depth Display SES for Windows Program Options Help alg Mme g oi FH q at E HF Depth 1 00 m The online calculated water depth from the HF channel is displayed in the upper right corner of the SESWIN window The depth calculation is based on the transducer depth and sound velocity see Main Menu Options System Settings System and can be adjusted to the actual conditions of the measurement via Parameter Menu Depth 5 6 Monitoring Windows There are four windows displaying different data e SIS displays the first 6 of 8 values imported from the navigation GPS data as defined via Options System Interfaces SIS SIS values 7 and 8 are displayed if the mouse cursor rests on SIS value number 6 e MS displays data received from a motion sensor Motion sensor data import is defined via Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor e SIG displays the envelope amplitude of the received echo signal This window can be used to adjust the amplifier settings e MAP displays a map with track information and optionally defined profile lines and target positions
103. GmbH 122 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 7 Howto record echo data SES for Windows Program Options Help e Activate the button System Mode The SES 2000 hardware is ready to record echoes e Recording the echoes starts when the Record button is clicked The received echoes are stored in a file The destination directory for that file can be chosen by the main menu item Options System Settings Files as well as a pattern for the file name Please see section 5 10 3 on page 68 for details Each transmitted pulse results in received data coming in through the HF channel and the LF channel Data from both channels are recorded If there are external devices GPS receiver motion sensor that have been connected and configured main menu item Options System Interfaces SIS Motion Sensor properly their data will be stored as well e The filename is created automatically using the time and date when the Record button is pressed e To finish data recording depress the Record button gt Please note that the transmitter is not switched on off automatically when recording is switched on off The transmitter has to be switched on separately before starting data logging gt To ensure best performance and data security data should be recorded on a local hard disk Do not use network locations or external USB hard drives for direct data recording Copy or move data after recordibg to a remote locati
104. H If the transducer is mounted to an intermediate support frame additional rubber mounts may be used to mount this support frame to the ROV frame see picture below SES 2000 ROV transducer mounted using rubber washers at the transducer flange as shown above and additional rubber mounts to the ROV frame Since the transducer is electrically isolated from the ROV frame by the rubber a separate ground connection has to be made trom the transducer housing to the frame and the pres sure vessel electronic unit of the SES 2000 ROV SBP to avoid corrosion and to reduce electrical noise 7 2 3 Where to place the transducer within the ROV frame Since HPU and thrusters produce a lot of noise the transducer should be placed as far away as possible from these noise sources Tests showed that by moving the transducer from the rear to the front decreased the noise level about 12 18dB factor of 4 8 depending on fre quency and pulse length used see pictures below Noise level change by transducer shift PRAY EERE RAL 9 ag s wr as wa tf K 4 fae Nine Ltn ay 3 pulses E 4 pulses Noise Level Difference dB 4 5 pulses Frequency kHz a Change of observed noise level at the SES 2000 SBP transducer after shifting the transducer from the rear to the front of the ROV frame a Echo prints calculated with the same settings gain stacking thresholds for 8kHz 3 pulses for the transducer placed at the ROV r
105. HE SES 2000 SYSTEM IS NOT WATERPROOF AND HAS TO BE USED IN DRY AND WATER PROTECTED ROOMS gt ALLOW FREE ACCESS OF AIR TO THE COOLING SLITS TO AVOID OVERHEATING gt THE SES 2000 DEVICE IS HEAVY BUT ALSO A SENSITIVE INSTRUMENT AND SHOULD BE CARRIED VERY CAREFULLY gt THE TRANSDUCER S ACTIVE AREA HAS TO BE PROTECTED AGAINST MECHANICAL DAMAGES AND PRESSURE gt DO NOT CHANGE THE SETUP OF THE SYSTEM s OPERATING SYSTEM OR CONTROL PC s BIOS gt DONOT INSTALL ANY OTHER SOFTWARE OR DEVICE DRIVER ON THE SES CONTROL COMPUTER INNOMAR is not liable for any damages that result from disregard these safety rules or any other improper operation of the SES 2000 systems 1 2 SES 2000 Manual This manual describes how to install and use the SES 2000 sub bottom profilers It is divided into a hardware orientated part and a description of the SES 2000 control and data acquisition software SES for Windows SESWIN Some facts about the document structure e Italics is used for file and path names e Keys belonging to the keyboard are enclosed in brackets If some keys have to be pressed at the same time they are separated by example Press Ctrl Alt Del to restart your computer e The symbol gt marks a very useful hint or key fact Innomar Technologie GmbH Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide See ee 2 Getting Started In this chapter a short introduction to the installation and opera
106. HF data are displayed and the LF channel is disabled Most of the processing parameters are available during the Side Scan Mode too Half Size View and Flot J Port and Starboard Flot Scan Direction It is possible to operate the SES system in a single side looking mode or to look at both sides Starboard and portside are individually selectable Master Channel The selected channel will be used for the water depth calculation and is plotted if starboard and port is selected and port and starboard plot is disabled in the Processing pane Processing The Slant Correction corrects for the geometrical distortion which is a typical effect of received side scan data The travel time of the received signal is recalculated to a true distance measured from the centre line below the transducer For a correct slant correction the transducer depth water depth and speed of sound are required It is always assumed during the calculation that the bottom is flat for the whole sounded area The data is stored without doing a slant correction In general it is recommended not to use the slant correction during the online mode because changes of the water depth can be missed very easily and the required range changes are not done when necessary The option Half Size View and Plot reduces the data width to be plotted onto the screen and onto the printer by a factor of two In most cases the screen dimension will be smaller the
107. IRD PARTY RIGHTS MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL INNOMAR OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS EVEN IF AN INNOMAR REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OR THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU WHERE LIABILITY CANNOT BE LEGALLY EXCLUDED BUT IT MAY BE LIMITED INNOMAR S LIABILITY AND THAT OF IT S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE Remark INNOMAR did its best to make software hardware and manual free of faults However if there should be a reason to complain or criticize INNOMAR will always have an ear for your suggestions and hints and will try to help INNOMAR reserves the right to change technical data 1998 2009 Innomar Technologie GmbH All rights reserved Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 5 1 Important Hints Attention Pleasel ccc cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenees 9 Tel SSA ST RICS seian E EE E EEE 9 t2 OES2000 Manuales E E ne eee 9 2 Gen aE aa naan wacauncecestatencteseeteainnnanes 11 2 1 SES 2000 System Overview and System Installation
108. Innomar Technologie GmbH Beside this fixed delay it is also possible to apply a delay that depends on the range currently used by the SES system Mode External Trigger Settings O Intermal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pe O0 24 00 ml Delay as percentage of range 40 ORetesting Tiaees Number of pings for one sync pulse This feature is useful if the SES sub bottom profiler is used together with a multibeam echosounder MBES and triggered by the MBES In that case the ping delay should be set to half the water depth to get the lowest impact of the SES system to the MBES data This can be automated by setting the Delay as percentage of range to 50 and using the MBES water depth for automatic range shift within the SESWIN software This procedure is explained in more detail in section 7 13 on page 139 It is also possible to combine fixed delay and delay based on used range Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pe 10000 31 50 m Delay as percentage of range 2 40 Number of pings for one syne pulse f Alternating Trigger The resulting delay is given in meter 6 2 3 External Synchronisation with Increased Ping Rate Bursts If you have to use a master device with a very low ping rate like a multi beam echosounder or a boomer you may increase the ping rate of the SES 2000 system to get optimal results With the ping rate in
109. Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 Narrow Beam Parametric Sub Bottom Profilers User s Guide SES 2000 compact SES 2000 light SES 2000 standard SES 2000 medium vat SES 2000 deep wos SES 2000 ROV V 2 8 June 2009 2 SES 2000 User s Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of INNOMAR Technologie GmbH The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement The software may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium or transmit in any form except as specifically allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of INNOMAR 1998 2009 INNOMAR Technologie GmbH All Rights reserved Trademarks INNOMAR is a registered trademark of Innomar Technologie GmbH Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows 95 98 2000 NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation IBM and VGA are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation Software License Agreement The copyright for the SES software is owned by Innomar Technologie GmbH INNOMAR The software license agree
110. Installation The main unit has to be installed on a dry and safe place and should be fixed with a suitable method to avoid mechanical destructions during rough sea The cooling slits on the bottom of the device and on the upper backside must not be covered gt Protect the unit and the installation place against water gt Make sure that the cooling slits are open and the ventilators can get air Connect all external devices monitor keyboard mouse printer but not motion sensor and navigation system to the SES 2000 device before you plug the power cable into the main unit Use only the according plugs and sockets gt Plug in the connectors that provide navigation data usually GPS and motion sensor data after the computer has booted and Windows is running gt Do not plug and unplug connectors while the system is running The power supply voltage has to be 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60Hz Having activated the SES 2000 system by switching the power on check first if all power supply LEDs are lit If not switch the system off immediately and contact your dealer or INNOMAR directly lf the Operating System runs it is possible to start the control software SES for Windows SESWIN Please see the regarding chapter for details Connection of Motion Sensors The SES 2000 systems are equipped with a serial interface to attach a motion sensor for heave compensation Different tyoes of motion sensors are possible To use the beam
111. Log Linear can be very rarely used if there is a particularly LF SRange 10 small dynamic range or poor signal to noise ratio LF HF Min Level range 1 10 steps 1 defines the threshold al ene LOG xl minimum level higher values can be used to remove noise from the HF Min Leve 4 echo print The optimum setting is where most of the noise is HF SRange 10 removed but with a small amount remaining This will ensure that no genuine data is removed from the screen LF HF SRange range 1 10 steps 1 defines the most upper threshold for echo print calculation it limits the dynamic range Since these settings are not permanent and can be changed during playback emphasis should be placed on acquiring good data by adjusting frequency pulse length and gains before experimenting with the threshold values Additional information about the signal processing algorithms and threshold tables is given in section 9 6 on page 192 Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 9 Quick Controls If the Quick Controls button in the button bar is pressed a reduced menu appears in place of the Parameter Menu that was described in the last section The Quick Controls give access to parameters that have to be SES for Windows a changed frequently during data acquisition Program Options Help LF Gain HF Gain has to be adjusted according to survey Quick Controls conditions range 0 90 dB steps 1
112. Pressing the button Open serverIP 192 168 115 11 Broadcast Server activates the Broadcast Server The dialog must not be closed while the server is rs Serer is not active 0 Clients are connected running c Upen Broadcast Server ma CLOSE Network On the remote computer you have to start the SES NetView application Sesnetview exe This program is located in the SESWIN folder on the SES 2000 system and can be copied to any other computer No installation is required After starting the SES NetView application you get the main screen as shown below SES NetView TCP IP Client Pressing the Connect button opens the TCP IP Mat sel elas client dialog as shown on the right Here you Server IP Address 192 168 115 91 have to key in the IP address of the activated Pot Dron i o ooo broadcast server and the NetView port number as shown in the SESWIN dialog above The connection will be established after the Connect Client is connected to 192 168 115 591 button is pressed The connect dialog has to be kept open closing the dialog will disconnect the client e CONNECT e DISCONNECT Innomar Technologie GmbH 152 SES 2000 User s Guide SES NetView Sele ee ee ee ee ee c 2 a E 2 mi a Ship Travel i j 2 Area SES Pingrate 13 82 pps Transmitter ON Recording OFF Printing OFF el ui 4 E The SES NetView window shows the echoprint of the 7 Displayed Chann
113. S The coloured LEDs in the status bar are used to monitor the status of the connections to peripherals The colours are Gi en OK Yellow Warning and ReGNGRVGrKing PRN Printer Information Red colour as above will mean no printer connected out of paper etc e HD NET Hard Disc space This shows the space remaining on the hard disc the data is being recorded on to The colour will change to yellow with 250MB remaining and then go to red when close to empty HD refers to the local hard disc while NET refers to the hard disc of a remote controlled system e MS Motion Sensor The colour will be yellow if there is a problem such as the MS string is not recognised or maybe vessel movements are too abrupt to be compen sated for Instable Flag and red if the motion sensor is unplugged or not working lf the ignore instable flag mode is enabled in the SESWIN Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor dialog this status LED is encircled yellow SESWIN 1 7 2 or higher e SIS Ship Information System navigation data The will be yellow if there is data coming but is not recognised e g due to wrong baud rate The colour will be red if there is no incoming data e Case If the system has a water protected case the rear cover must be removed before using the system Red colour indicates that a closed cover is detected and the transmitter cannot be switched on e MCP Multi Purpose COM Port see section 5 11 3 on page 8
114. S Up oN a cre ace external trigger pulses withs specified delay Number of external pings before starting pinging itself Time frame of external device ps i OO000 SES Ping SES sample range a E SC one TX cycle Altemating Trigger Settings If Time frame of external device is set toa Cee ee ee en Corte small value or zero Alternating Trigger mode Number of extemal pings results in simple interleaved pinging with Time frame of external device pe gt adjustable delay SES Ping a SES sample range E E i E E E one TX cycle Trigger pulse at Time frame of g Trigger OUT external device Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 107 6 4 Deep Sea Pulse Mode Deep Sea Burst Mode Range Process There is a special Deep Sea Pulse Mode available to ensure the Depth Threshold highest possible pulse rate even in deep waters see section 9 5 4 General _Transmit Gain on page 191 This mode will produce either equidistant pulses or bursts of sound pulses Bursts are useful to reduce interference with other acoustic equipment like multibeam MBES If the burst es mode shall be used the duty cycle has to be set active time of total time frame in percent within the SESWIN Options System ee E Settings Synchronisation tab Burst Mode Settings M High Energy Mode Percentage of active time fram
115. SES 2000 User s Guide At start of the survey only the EM710 should be pinging to ensure proper seafloor detection without any interference For this all above mentioned settings should be made and the MBES running externally triggered but SES 2000 SBP transmission switched off If seafloor is picked up correctly by the MBES SBP transmitting can be switched on If all settings are correct the MBES bottom pick will not be affected by the SBP ping Optimizing the SES 2000 SBP settings In case of interference there are two parameters that could be modified within the SESWIN software e Percentage of active time frame within the System Burst Made Settings Settings see above Percentage of active time frame Zt 0 To reduce interference this value may be decreased to reduce number of SBP pings per cycle e The number of DSM Transmit cycles put into one Depth l Threshold General Transmit Basic Transmit cycle see timing diagram above Se5BgeL can be reduced by the Adjust Ping Rate slider in the Range parameter menu Stat E To reduce interference the number of SBP pings per Lengh 30m cycle may be reduced by moving the slider to the wi oR right M use LF Waterdepth Ping Rate 0 00 pps Foot Print 3dB 0 0 m Foot Print 6dB 0 0 m 7 13 4 Ensure the optimal settings at changing water depth As seen from the examples above optimal settings depend on transducer altitude above sea
116. SIS Data and Print Page Header High print quality lf checked the picture will be printed in the high quality mode of the printer This is only possible in File Mode because the high quality printing is too slow for the online system mode Print SIS Data f checked the SIS data as defined in the Border Cycle section will be printed in the margin of the echoprint Print Page Header lf checked a page header containing additional information is printed on top of each echoprint page Printer Language Should be set according to the printer currently used if printer interface is set to Parallel Port in the SESCONFIG configuration tool see section 4 2 Select between the HP printer languages or different thermal paper printers The HP printers will produce echo plots in real time page by page The thermal printers produce grey scaled echo plots on rolls or sheets lf you use an EPC printer make sure you made the correct settings in the EPC printer as follows Interface parallel Shades 16 Media Type paper Data Type 6 bit Width 2048 Supported printers are listed in appendix A 5 on page 229 Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 11 7 System Interfaces Coordinates System Interfaces Ed It is possible to transform the WGS84 coordinates into UTM Position Data Source Position Data Destination coordinates Or to apply a SIS String Number for LON Position 1 SIS String Number for t Position 7 user defined transformation SIS Strin
117. T P Y 3 5 GND SUBCONN ea 6 GPS 2 7 GPS 3 MRU GPS input One RS232 connection labeled MRU goes to the MRU input of the SES system unit The other RS232 connection labeled GPS goes to the GPS receiver to obtain GPVTG messages en InnomarTechnologieGmbH s ses i s lt iCSt SES 2000 User s Guide 233 A 7 GPS NMEA Sentences GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data CO NO Of W DN co 10 11 12 13 14 15 GPGGA hhmmss ss Ill lla yyyyy yy a x XX X X X xX M x x M x x xxxx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt UTC of Position Latitude Nors Longitude E or W GPS quality indicator O invalid 1 GPS fix 2 Diff GPS fix Number of satellites in use not those in view Horizontal dilution of position Antenna altitude above below mean sea level geoid Meters Antenna height unit Geoidal separation Diff between WGS 84 earth ellipsoid and mean sea level Meters Units of geoidal separation Age in seconds since last update from diff reference station Diff reference station ID Checksum VTG Actual track made good and speed over ground O ON On FW N S GPVTG t T S SS N S ss K hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Track made good Fixed text T indicates that track made good is relative to true north not used not used Speed over ground in knots Fixed text N indicates that speed over ground in in knots Speed over ground in kilometers hour Fixed text K indicates that speed over groun
118. The additional trigger delay shifts the interference caused by the SES system onto a certain depth level and the wrong depth values can be removed easily The following pictures illus trate the shift of wrong water depth values of the centre beam s within the MBES screen with increasing trigger delay An optimal setting for the trigger delay would be if the starting time for the SES 2000 pulse were just half of the water depth trigger delay about 40 60 of range Innomar Technologie GmbH as shown in the screen shot above Please note that the delay can be given absolutely in microseconds and or relative to range Both values will be added to get the total delay p If the delay time increases some interference from the transmitted signal of the SES 2000 will be visible on top of the MBES Screen All the interferences above and below the real seabed can cause wrong detected points and gaps in the seabed Apart from post processing steps to remove these wrong points it is often possible to adjust a depth filter directly within the MBES operating software To get the highest possible ping rate with the SES 2000 system you should use the smallest useful range length for both systems MBES and SES 2000 SBP Reson SeaBat MBES settings To avoid the MBES picking up the SBP interference it is possible to use gates for seabed detection within the RESON Seabat MBES software Please refer to the Seabat manual how to set up these gates The
119. V s mounting frame using elastic material e g rubber During operation the transducer has to be covered by water all the time To secure this the transmitters are deactivated if the pressure sensor in the electronic container detects a tow depth less than 5 meters Important notes for the installation of the transducer e An arrow on top of the transducer marks the forward direction e The cable has to be laced onto the cable holder on top of the transducer e The transducer cable must not be plugged unplugged when power is switched on e Ifthe transducer cable is not plugged in the connector has to be protected by a pressure cap e A ground wire has to be connected between the GND contact on the transducer and the GND contact on the pressure vessel e During transportation the shipped transport box has to be used Innomar Technologie GmbH 32 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 8 SES 2000 sidescan Extension Optionally there is an additional side scan transducer available to use the SES 2000 compact light and standard systems as digital side scan device The transducer fixing on the ship is the same as for the sub bottom profiler transducer Dimensions ca 62cm x 10cm x 20cm WxHxD Weight ca 23kg incl 20m cable Some technical specs are given below Frequency 100kHz Pulse length 100 250us Pulse rate up to 25 s Beam width 0 9 35 along across track Transducer angle 40 or 60 Range 20 100m
120. a 6378150 rf 298 3 Fischer 1968 helmert a 6378200 f 298 3 Helmert 1906 hough a 6378270 0 rf 297 Hough intl a 6378388 0 rf 297 International 1909 Hayford krass a 6378245 0 rf 298 3 Krassovsky 1942 kaula a 6378163 rf 298 24 Kaula 1961 lerch a 6378139 rf 298 257 Lerch 1979 mprts a 6397300 rf 191 Maupertius 1738 new_intl a 6378157 5 b 6356772 2 New International 1967 plessis a 6376523 b 6355863 Plessis 1817 France SEasia a 6378155 0 b 6356773 3205 Southeast Asia walbeck a 6376896 0 b 6355834 8467 Walbeck WGS60 a 6378165 0 rf 298 3 WGS 60 WGS66 a 6378145 0 rf 298 25 WGS 66 WGS72 a 6378135 0 rf 298 26 WGS 72 WGS84 a 6378137 0 rf 298 257223563 WGS 84 sphere a 6370997 0 b 6370997 0 Normal Sphere r 6370997 For a detailed description please refer to other sources Predefined datum names name WGS84 GGRS87 NAD83 potsdam carthage ellipse WGS84 GRS80 GRS80 definition comments towgs84 0 0 0 towgs84 199 87 74 79 246 62 Greek_Geodetic_Reference_System_1987 bessel clark80 hermannskogel bessel ire65 mod_airy towgs84 0 0 0 towgs84 606 0 23 0 413 0 towgs84 263 0 6 0 431 0 Carthage 1934 Tunisia towgs84 653 0 212 0 449 0 Hermannskogel towgs84 482 530 130 596 564 557 1 042 0 214 0 631 8 15 Ireland 1965 North_American_Datum_1983 Potsdam Rauenberg 1950 DHDN For a detailed description please refer to other sources Innomar Technologie GmbH 138 SES 2000 User s Guide Pre
121. a Output on line recording of envelope and full waveform data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters and navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print integrated TFT Display external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format network LAN output of echoprint data and auxiliary data for HYPACK integration or additional monitoring Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 217 Description Data Input e Serial RS232 or network input for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format e Serial RS232 input for motion sensor data used for heave and roll pitch compensation e Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input Control Unit state of the art integrated PC MS WINDOWS XP professional operating system Power Supply Requirements 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz power consumption lt 1500 W power on current surge duration lt 35A lt 0 1sec power line fused 2 25A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C lt 70 non condensing rel humidity EMC The SES 2000 deep system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance against electrical interference EN 55011 emission standards For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see a
122. a small cover plate there are some additional fuses that protect the transmitter s power supply Each fuse holder contains the fuse in use and a Spare fuse Distance Sensor eee Some SES 2000 systems are optionally equipped with special housings for rough environmental conditions These units have a distance sensor in the rear panel to prevent running the system without removing the rear cover It will not be possible to activate the transmitters if the cases are closed You have to remove the covers from the front side and from the backside and you must realise a distance between backside of the unit and wall of about 15 cm in minimum Innomar Technologie GmbH 44 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 14 Installing additional Sensors 3 14 1 Installing Testing the Motion Sensor The SES 2000 systems are equipped with a serial interface to attach a motion sensor For the motion sensor an external power supply is necessary INNOMAR usually provide a power supply together with the motion sensor The SES 2000 compact and light systems can use the heave information only but in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems the roll pitch and heave information is used depending on the transducer type For these systems a sensor with accuracy for pitch and roll better than 0 5 should be used The recognized data formats are described in the appendix The sensor has to be fixed firmly and must not vibrate It should be placed as clos
123. a transfer via local area network LAN There is a WINDOWS operated PC inside the SES device and a network connector is placed at the front panel To connect an external computer notebook or any other PC to the SBP you need either a crossover network cable or a router nub and two normal network cables Both computers should have unique IP addresses within the same range The IP address is to be set up as follows e Right click Local Area Connection in tool bar or Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Local Area Connection e Right click and go to Properties e Inthe General tab double click Internet Protocol TCP IP e Set IP addresses with same first 3 numbers The last number has to be different in the screen dumps below 192 168 115 on both computers and the last part 11 different e Subnet mask has to be 255 255 255 0 e Please note Obtain IP address automatically as set on many computers will not work in this case Zo local Area Connection Piaperties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General General Authentication Advanced You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for E9 NVIDIA nForce MCP Networking Con GaSe es This connection uses the following items Obtain an IP address automatically z 5 M A File and Printer Sharin
124. a used for heave and roll pitch compensation Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input Control Unit state of the art integrated PC MS WINDOWS XP professional operating system Power Supply Requirements 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz power consumption lt 500 W power on current surge duration lt 25A lt 0 1sec power line fused 2 16A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C lt 70 non condensing rel humidity EMC The SES 2000 standard system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance against electrical interference EN 55011 emission standards Option 100kHz Side scan Extension For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 213 A 2 4 SES 2000 medium Specifications SES 2000 medium Dimension and Weight The SES 2000 medium consists of two system units Main Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 44 cm Housing 19 inch 9U Weight about 50 kg Extension Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 44 cm Housing 19 inch 9U Weight about 55 kg Optional housings for rough environments are available Transducer Dimensions LxWxH 50 cm x 50 cm x 12 cm Weight incl 3x30m cable about 80
125. aced on a 130mm circle Innomar Technologie GmbH 204 Transducer for permanent and moon pool installation 55 There are 3 cables going from the transducer to the electronic boxes The cables cannot be detached the transducer cable length ca 30m cable diameter ca 20mm cable bend radius min 200mm plug diameter ca 55mm from 76 SES 2000 User s Guide Plug connector 3 3 Cables mounting holes D10 5mm countersunk A A water fill hole D15mm 4i st ce wz LO forward y y The arrow indicates forward direction for correct beam steering Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 205 A 1 4 SES 2000 deep Transducer The following sketch shows the SES 2000 deep transducer consisting of three sections mounted into a sea chest for permanent installation Each transducer section Is fixed by 4 M8 screws in a frame that is mounted into the sea chest The transducer cables are going through a classified sealing on top of the sea chest into the ship The transducer cable has a sea water resistant polyurethane sheet minimum recommended bend radius static 100mm dynamic 220mm YY y VA O O CO 4 y S A a D gt 780 940 Innomar Technologie GmbH 206 SES 2000 User
126. ading Roll Pitch Position Linear soeed Compensation values and Status information The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings HEHDT x xx T hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where x xx is the true heading in degrees hh is a checksum PHTRO x Xx a y yy b hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where x xx is the pitch in degrees a is M for bow up P for bow down y yy Is the roll in degrees b is B for port down or T for port up PHLIN X XXX y Vyy Z ZZZ hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where X XXX IS the surge X1 in meters signed y yyy is the sway X2 in meters signed Z Zzz is the heave X3 in meters signed PHSPD X xXxx y VyY zZ ZZZ hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where x xxx is the X1 speed in m s signed y yyy is the X2 speed in m s signed Z ZZZ is the X3 speed in m s signed PHCMP III 11 a xx xx b N hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where lIll Il is the latitude in degrees two first I and in minutes four last I a is N for Northern hemisphere or S for Southern hemisphere Xx XxX IS the speed in knots PHINF hhhhhhhh hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where hhhhhhhh is the hexadecimal value of Octans status Innomar Technologie GmbH 242 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 243 A 9 TCP IP Error Codes Below some TCP IP error messages are listed by error number that may occur during network operation Not all of them apply to SES 2000 opera
127. ajor drawback for nonlinear acoustics the low electro acoustic efficiency The source level of the primary frequencies f f has to be 30 40 dB higher than the desired source level of the difference frequency F depending on the F ratio f 0 5 f 4 Nevertheless there is not going to be any significant impact on marine mammals due to the high frequencies very short pulses and narrow sound beams used by nonlinear sub bottom profilers Directivity Small sized low frequent transducers using linear acoustics have a wide beam width and therefore a low horizontal resolution Wider beams cause a higher reverberation level than narrow ones Small geological structures or objects may be obscured by the noise level especially if the objects are located near the seafloor or near layer boundaries as shown in subsection reverberation level below For nonlinear transmission the far field directivity for the difference frequency is nearly the same as the one for the mean primary frequency see figure below Therefore it is possible to generate low frequent sound pulses with narrow beams using small transducers The footprint of the sound beam has nearly the same size for different secondary frequencies which is important when the records are compared for classification purposes There are no significant side lobes for the difference frequency in nonlinear acoustics 0 The figure shows the beam pattern for a TARR parametric transducer at 100
128. al SYMCMNOMIS ALON as ccencsuins eicadoxiateasate rs aciadeblevesdbacaibaentived Macsoeeitorngduaneek 100 Bio ATETMAUING TNggE asins ian taut dcreved2uves tumesebbiciseucuivarh R 105 6 4 Deep Sea Pulse Mode Deep Sea Burst Mode cccccecseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 107 I FOW Oee earte scene tennis E R E E sadmaprmeusauaael 109 7 1 How to avoid the engine s noise by proper transducer MOUNTING cceeeeeees 109 7 2 Howto install the SES 2000 ROV transducer ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesens 111 7 3 How to install and set up a MOTION SENSOL ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaees 113 7 4 How to setup the SES 2000 compact USB device Orivel cccccseeeeeeeneeeeeeees 115 7 5 How to update the SESWIN Softwar e cccccesccecesssseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseaseeeessaneeeenes 119 7 6 How to boot and shutdown the SES 2000 systems ccccceecceeeseceeeeeeeeseeeeeteees 121 L HOW tOTecod echo Cala aracssenaie ea E a 122 7 8 How to display previously recorded data ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeas 123 7 9 How to print out an echogram sicsnstwunsinntiaineersevsirngttaveiuietixetnssinleimeneheanunsivuienieientt 124 7 10 How to set marker lines in the echoprint cccceeccceeeeceeeeeceececeeeeseneesseeeeseesens 126 7 11 How to set up Navigation Data Interface SIS ceccecsseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeesaees 131 7 12 How to set up UTM conversion tiw
129. all Netw KER After double clicking System press button Device 7 i Manager on tab sheet Hardware The new installed maga COM ports should be listed in section Ports COM amp el LPT as shown below There must be no exclamation Ea 4 Computer Se Disk drives or question marks assigned to these Ports Display adapters E DVD CD ROM drives The assigned port numbers COMx have to be lower Floppy disk controllers l IDE ATA ATAPT controllers than 32 If higher port numbers are assigned open the Sg IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers i ap Keyboards Properties dialog by double clicking the listed COM 4 9 Mice and other pointing devices 7 port Monitors etwork adapters i Y m The COM port number can be changed in the C ka e Sa Advanced section of the Port Settings F USB Serial Port COME WY AE pert OMe lf there are no free COM ports choose a number you aaa ae think it s not in use WINDOWS will complain then but H Sound video and game controllers Esse Storage volumes in most cases it will accept your decision System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers File Action wiew Help USB Serial Port COM6 Properties ud Advanced Settings for COM6 General Port Settings Driver Details _ COM Port Number COME Bits per second 3600 USB Transfer Sizes c ancel a e B Select lower settings to corect perfo
130. allation the SES Server button will be automatically disabled All network status and error messages are visible at the page Messages of this dialog If the network configuration is fine and the SES Server is listening and working properly the LED at the dialog s bottom is highlighted green otherwise the LED is highlighted red If a client is successfully connected to the server the client s IP address is shown at the right side of the dialog It is possible to enable or disable the acceptance of incoming messages from the client to change the system parameters Innomar Technologie GmbH 90 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 12 4 Network SES Client To operate the SES 2000 system remotely controlled by an external PC the SESWIN software has to be installed not only on the SES system Server but also on the remote computer Client and you have to set the port addresses properly The item Network SES Client starts the Client Mode of the SES for Windows SESWIN application In this mode echo sounder data is received via the TCP IP protocol from a SES 2000 system running in Server Mode A SES Client can transmit commands via the network to the server The server must be configured to accept commands from the client The SES Client can be any computer system with appropriate resources and computing power running the SESWIN software and must not be a SES 2000 system itself Client Mode Messages Network Settings Additional Options
131. alone systems boot the system Bits per second 115200 e start a terminal program e g Windows Daabis ja ooo HyperTerminal Start All Programs Accessories i i arity Nowe Communications HyperTerminal mk e connect to COM1 using 115kBaud 8 N 1 no Stop bits 1 zi handshake Flow control Mone e Now you should receive data containing the string SES 96 Restore Defaults Cancel Apply lf these data are OK and the SESWIN echoprint area is not scrolling contact INNOMAR Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 169 8 2 Special SES 2000 compact problems The SES 2000 compact is the only INNOMAR system without integrated control computer 8 2 1 SES configuration tool cannot detect SES 2000 compact main unit Sesconfig exe first of all tries to detect the High Soeed Comm Port If that port is not detected different reasons might exist 1 The USB link cable has not been connected 2 Ifthe PC is used the very first time with SESWIN 2000 Compact make sure the USB drivers have been installed on the PC see chapter Configuration 3 SESWIN 2000 Compact has not yet finished booting Allow 20 to 30 seconds for booting before invoking sesconfig exe 4 Windows did not notice that the USB cable has been plugged in Activate the Device Manager With the USB cable plugged in there should be two additional COMM ports If they do not exist switch off SESWIN 2000 Compact and the PC Allow
132. alues are COM ports of the control PC and have to be selected manually in any case You should Disable Auto Detection for SES Ports before closing the dialog The other items of the SES configuration tool are described in section 4 2 on page 47 7 4 4 Checking the system setup Now you should check if all COM ports have been set up properly by starting the SESWIN system software e The SESWIN echoplot area on the screen should be scrolling Data port OK e Vary the range the scrolling is either faster or more slowly Control port OK To check the other ports the appropriate settings have to be made in the SESWIN Options dialog Now you can e Connect the GPS device to the COM port that has been chosen as the SIS Interface Then position data should appear in the SIS window left bottom corner of the screen e Use HyperTerminal or a similar program to see what data comes out of the Depth Out serial port Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 119 7 5 How to update the SESWIN software For updating the SES 2000 SESWIN software follow the procedure described below 1 Make notes of relevant settings of the software This should include all port settings from the SESCONFIG and the main settings from the SESWIN Options System Interfaces System Settings To get screen dumps of the SESWIN settings you may just press the button in the lower right corner see figure below Bitmap files of all tabs are generated
133. always adjust the gain settings within SESWIN based on the amplitude window within the SESWIN software and not via the colours in the echoplot windows Hypack or SESWIN The echo plot is generated based on threshold values and may not represent the signal amplitude within the dynamic range correctly Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 151 7 15 Using SES NetView to display echo data on remote computer Sometimes it is useful to have echoprint data and main system seitings available on another remote screen s in order to give a second operator or supervisor the possibility to QC the online data acquisition For this the SESWIN Broadcast Server can be utilized see section 5 12 2 on page 88 This feature can be used to display echoprint data and SESWIN status information on different remote computers It is not possible to remote control the SES 2000 system by this connection For remote controlled operation of SES 2000 sub bottom profilers see section 7 16 on page 153 To start the SES Broadcast Server open the corresponding dialog via SESWIN main menu Options Broadcast Server BrociliacGariea equ The broadcast server will send two data streams on two different ports if activated For display echo data on remote computers the NetView Mode is used The Network Settings server IP address is shown because it has to be set on the client The port number can be changed if Local Port 4011 necessary default is 4011
134. as attempted to an unreachable network This usually means the local software knows no route to reach the remote host 10052 Network dropped connection on reset The connection has been broken due to keep alive activity detecting a failure while the operation was in progress 10053 Software caused connection abort An established connection was aborted by the software in your host machine possibly due to a data transmission time out or protocol error 10054 Connection reset by peer An existing connection was forcibly closed by the remote host This normally results if the peer application on the remote host is suddenly stopped the host is rebooted or the remote host uses a hard close This error may also result if a connection was broken due to keep alive activity detecting a failure while one or more operations are in progress 10055 No buffer space available An operation on a socket could not be performed because the system lacked sufficient buffer Space or because a queue was full 10056 Socket is already connected A connect request was made on an already connected socket 10057 Socket is not connected A request to send or receive data was disallowed because the socket is not connected and when sending on a datagram socket using sendto no address was supplied 10058 Cannot send after socket shutdown A request to send or receive data was disallowed because the socket had already been shut down in that direction with a
135. as concentration in the upper sediment layers In areas with high gas concentration there is strong backscatter of the incident sound waves at the gas bubbles as well as strong sound attenuation inside the gassy sediment These mechanism both depend on the bubble size related to the sound wave length see below In the next figure the seafloor shows strong reflections red colour for most parts of the profile There is no penetration and no information about the layer structures can be obtained due to the strong back scattering of the gas bubbles In areas with no or only negligible gas concentration the reflection signal from the bottom is more than ten times smaller green yellow and penetration into the sediment is possible Innomar Technologie GmbH 196 SES 2000 User s Guide WS od Be rea SEE ai aah h r lt a re x CAR ay RRS neve eer or ae ty Echo print example with high gas concentration in the top sediment layer and small gas free parts We a a a Sait a ra Sa ae Sm s a aa eee N PUAS Er ae ps ime ct ai oe Fries Ore b m m r Echo print example with decreasing gas concentration from left to right The echoprint above shows a data example with decreasing gas concentration from left to right The left hand part of the picture shows a low reflectivity seafloor blue green colours indicating soft sediments No sediment structures are visible indicating either strong atten uation or a very thick compact se
136. as master channel Load Save Scheme lt is possible to save and reload the beam steering settings file extension is ang Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 73 5 10 8 System Settings Multi Frequency Option System Settings Ed For some SES 2000 System Synchronisation Files View Marker Beam Steering systems it S possible to i Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scan transmit consecutive pings Frequency Setup with different centre Mode Combination of 2 frequencies frequencies and or different Master Channel pulse length The necessary Tet Frequency 5 kHz 1 Pulses f Fight View settings are made in this 2nd Frequency 2 kHz 2 Pulses f Center View dialog while the Multi Frequency Transmission is Multi Frequency Options switched on off within the 7 Amplifier Comection depending on Frequency SESWIN Parameter menu Transmit Frequency Setup It is possible to transmit two or three frequency pulse length combinations subsequently Transmit frequency and pulse length can be chosen arbitrarily In Multi Frequency Mode the number of frequency combinations used reduces pulse repetition rate per frequency During multi frequency operation beam steering and data compression are disabled In split view either the HF channels or the LF channels of the multi frequency signals are displayed You can change a master channel for processing e g the determination of water depth or fo
137. ate Profile Area 08 01 2007 Profil2 K hungsbom PEN E Time W Profile E Are 19 29 32 lt gt File Info Name D SES Applcations D ata 0601 20071 92932 ses SIZE 34456 KByte Time 19 29 32 19 43 49 Profile 2 Frequency 8 KHz 3 Pulses men Directory Selection After selecting a directory Browse the browser searches for SES data files ses and classifies the files according to date profile number and area File Selection The files are sorted by recording date profile number and area The Zoom function makes it easier to find a special data file The files found get a certain colour they are displayed in a window which represents a time of 24 hours starting at 0 00 h The vertical line marks the beginning of the selected file The time shown represents the file s recording time File Info The File Info gives detailed information regarding the selected file such as path name size of file recording time profile number LF frequency and pulse length Load A file can be opened either using the Load button or by double clicking at the file s location in the File Selection window Innomar Technologie GmbH 94 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 14 2 File Cutter To extract sub selections of SES data files a file cutter can be used Main Menu Program File Cutter available in file mode only File Cutter Directory Selection Hame D SE 5 Applications D ata Bro
138. ate a second echo to be displayed Thus the SNR is enhanced without data reduction E yY Echo 1 Echo 2 xX Echo 3 The pictures on the right show echoprints of an artificial test signal with noise a stacking only b and smoothing only c The number of echoes used for stacking and smoothing is the same Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 193 4 y ee seg f AN GM sian Vii me A na AT er ru AV ae xa O 3 RA Jib pai x N Ty j AN Apa a A H T Oo rt d z ECLI f pay i A Q mA ahaa aS i ene st Ee uaa ie Aa abat D een A ye aw etm hy an w i AN va caer a cuca ate dk oa airiai PLY ine i i A y ot eo m4 a Pii aN in a 4 Nias ag pee eas t ly a Seated ae Y eta Leaky T E a Pon 7 of pee 4 araa g rh MERAY ie Med AT ete nie dat ae Wainy en mAs S pa ip Spat ay Kereta im arate niy Aaa NAY it ae ae ie ta esis k AD oh peri os Mi wer east a BEN A T A nthe ote hgh Tye wes ely rile len ro Peeks int i i a5 h Mot saving A X n ta He on Sa on pie AP aie Mal eo Ta Ee i tw Ms Neal giad fy Te T i i A ve ARR 33 S AEk ins Fae OC iui i s TT 7 Ive fi s Wa A se TY ew ir Wh Ja y ae Vie t j a dei is A i i gt wi y NE A od nA 7 r a4 7 R ANEETA Ei y paN Ki eat bate Pane a be t A r k Da y Higa Anah i of jas Wey sath fa NA ay nti e ee We Patan Hegre on sons Si N Pee we As Echoprint without stacking smoothing a s
139. ater depth 10kHz 0 04m 0 02 of water depth Analog Output band limited LF signal 10V Data Record 2 channels primary frequency HF and secondary frequency LF Pata Record both channels envelope data for the selected range Innomar Technologie GmbH 208 SES 2000 User s Guide Signal Processing bandpass filters adjusted automatically according to transmission pulse characteristics noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing DSP for improved resolution and penetration into sediment heave compensation and swell filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoprints replay of previously recorded files Data Output on line recording of envelope data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters and navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print integrated TFT Display external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format network LAN output of echoprint data and auxiliary data for HYPACK integration or additional monitoring Data Input Serial RS232 or network input for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format Serial RS232 input for motion sensor data used for heave and roll pitch compensation Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input Control Unit Power Supply Requirements 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz power consumption lt 300 W power on current
140. ating the SES 2000 system via local area network LAN In order to remote control the SES 2000 system via LAN the SESWIN software has to be installed on the remote computer and a network connection has to be established SES 2000 system computer server settings e Start the SES configuration tool sesconfig exe and set network operation as server SES Configuration System Network Display Network Settings Network Options E iori Auto Start of Network Server If the checkbox for the automatic start of the Network Server is checked the SESWIN software will switch into server mode on start up automatically This is useful if the main unit is located in a server room or if you are using the SES 2000 ROV system This automatic should not be used before remote control is set up and tested e Start SESWIN and start the SES network dialog via Main Menu Options Network SES Server Hetwork Server Mode Messages Network Settings Connections Local Fort 50096 Check to enable commands Options i not connected Local Server F 192 168 115 11 General Login at Startup k 8 SES Server is not active Network SES Server 48 NAY Server is not active S15 Monitor MCF Monitor SES SERVER s NET CLOSED The server IP address is read automatically but should be known for the client computer The Local Port number has to be the same for the server and all clients Per default it is 50096
141. bH 108 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 109 7 Howto 7 1 How to avoid the engine s noise by proper transducer mounting General hints about transducer mounting are given in 3 10 on page 34 The ship s engine often causes a mechanical vibration of the entire hull of the ship These vibrations can go to the transducer via its support and the hull can emit sound that causes noise in the SBP receiver too The frequency range of the vibrations depends on several facts like the vibra tion source the resonance frequencies of the mechanical parts for example the mounting pipe Although the received signal is bandpass filtered in the SES systems there may be still undesired frequency components within the used frequency range caused by the vibrating engine The engine s influence to the noise level for an unfavourable transducer mounting close to the engine is illustrated in the figures below There is a dramatic change in the noise level when changing the revolution speed of the engine From these figures also a frequency dependence of the noise level can be seen Since the engine s noise is mainly below 6 kHz and the receiver signal is band limited according to the transmitted pulse the signal to noise ratio SNR gets better when the frequency and or the pulse length is increased Engine revolution er dependence of the noise level aie constant 46 dB pulse andi 500 us The
142. cast Server ma CLOSE Network c Upen Broadcast Server ma CLOSE Network The broadcast server SESWIN 1 7 2 or higher can be used to transmit echoprint data to other computers for data observation using special software e g HYPACK see section 7 14 on page 148 This connection cannot be used for remote controlling the SES system Local Port has to be set according to network requirements Server IP is given for information has to be set in the client software used for data display Send RAW data If full waveform data are available these may send instead of the envelope data default by activating the checkbox If additional echoprint screens are required for QC data of the SESWIN master channel is sent on a second port by the broadcast server that may be received by INNOMAR s SES NetView application This is described in more detail in section 7 15 on page 151 SES NetView Seles Hi 4 E the c 2 a E 2 mi a Ship Traveli i area SES Pingrate 13 82 pps Transmitter OM Recording OFF Printing GFF Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 12 3 Network SES Server To operate the SES 2000 system remotely controlled by an external PC the SESWIN software has to be installed not only on the SES system Server but also on the remote computer Client and you have to set the port addresses properly The item Network SES Server starts the Server Mode of the SES for Windows SESWIN
143. ce Input comz Depth alues Output Coms Data Port High Speed Control Port coms Multi Purpose Fort Input coma In the System tab External computer has to be activated Data Port and Control Port should be set to COM ports not available in your system This is a precaution for older SESWIN versions Start SESWIN and start the SES network dialog via Main Menu Options Network SES Client Client Mode Messages Network Settings Additional Options Local Pork 50096 Server F 1 92 168 115 82 Resat 05 of SES Sewer Program Eei General Login at Startup Depth i Network SES Client so I et 8 SES Client is not active 48 NAY Client iz not active SIS GP5 Heading via Network Port Broadcast Server 5I5 Monitor MFP Monitor The Local Port number has to be the same as for the server The Server P has to be set according to the server s settings e SES CLIENT NET CLOSED Start the client mode by pressing the button SES Client the SESWIN program is now trying to connect to the server with the specified IP address If for any reason the network connection cannot be established for example due to wrong network card installation or wrong IP address the SES Client button will be automatically disabled All network status and error messages are visible at the page Messages of this dialog lf the network configuration is fine
144. check the transducer cable before using the transducer The insulation must no show any faults In accordance with the safety rules and because of the high voltage that is used for transmitting it is strictly forbidden to run the system with a defective transducer cable Avoid any sharp items while handling the cable If the transducer cable is damaged make sure that the whole system is switched off before touching the cable Disconnect and replace the transducer For repairing the trans ducer cable please contact INNOMAR or an authorized person The transducer should be clean while using If the transducer is situated in water for a longer time without using it please check if the active area of the transducer is clean before using the system again The transducer can be damaged if you work with it and there are for instance mussels seaweeds filth or mud on the active area In any case there will be a high loss of the acoustical power Be careful during cleaning the active area of the transducer Don t use sharp tools The surface of the transducer must not be damaged Furthermore no paint anti fouling oil or grease should be on the active area of the transducer The active area of the transducer must not be exposed to strong sunlight for a longer period since UV light affects the chemical and mechanical properties of the material used Thermal stress e g putting sun heated transducers into cold water has to be avoided as well 8 1 2 El
145. cle For this system the maximum power consumption is less than 450 Watts even while using long low frequent sound pulses at high pulse rate 3 15 2 Power on inrush current There are switched voltage converters used within the SES 2000 units to ensure a wide input voltage range 115 230V AC 5 10 50 60Hz These power supply modules draw a strong surge current during power on for a short time The figure below shows the 30 25 20 Inrush Current A a 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 Time s Inrush current measured with the SES 2000 standard system power supply 220V The figure shows strong current for a very short time less than 10ms 3 15 3 Conclusions The mean power consumption of the SES 2000 SBPs depends on different parameters The maximum values are given in the table below There is a strong switch on inrush current that may blow fast fuses Therefore the power supply should be use slow fuses with a current rating given in the table below All values are given for a power supply voltage of 230V Lower voltages will require higher currents The power rating may be slightly different at other voltages as well due to changes in efficiency of the power supply modules used within the SES systems SES 2000 Power consumption Mains Fuse compact lt 250 W 10 A slow light lt 400 W 16 A slow standard lt 500 W 16 A slow medium lt 900 W 20 A slow deep lt 1500 W 25 A s
146. crease feature of the SES 2000 there is a burst of sound pings initiated every time an external trigger event occurs The user sets the number of pings within one burst the time delay of the pings within one burst is set automatically depending on the range settings Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 103 Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping ps D 0 00 mj Delay as percentage of range 2 OU Number of pings for one sync pulse number of pings 3 sianal Triaaer OUT Due to the transmitted bursts of sound pings it may happen that the SESWIN echo screen scrolls not continuously any longer especially when using a small number of pings at large trigger intervals The SES system will transmit a full burst as defined in the synchronisation window at any conditions If the number of pings per burst does not fit into the trigger interval the next trigger event will be discarded This may cause a sudden drop in the effective ping rate if the external ping rate changes slightly If external trigger events are discarded due to high delay values or too many pings required per burst the trigger information EXT in the SESWIN status bar starts to flash yellow Range 2m 7m LF Freq 10kHz LF Pulses 1 Profile 1 30 08 2007 12453 ERT FRN no paper But 0 Page 0 HD 3039MB The next figure illustrates what happens if there is too many pings
147. cwiicnitsnan abide alan ae 132 7 13 How to avoid interference with other ACOUSTIC SYStEMS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 139 7 14 Using the Broadcast Server to display data on HYPACK cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 7 15 Using SES NetView to display echo data on remote COMpUTET c cseeeeeeees 151 7 16 How to remote control a SES 2000 SBP cc ecccccceccececeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 153 7 17 How to transfer SES 2000 SBP data to another computer ceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 7 18 How to use SESWIN s documentation and report tools cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 162 8 Maintenance and Error Handling cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaes 165 8 1 Hardware Handling and Maintenance cccccecccseeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseueeseeeesseeeess 166 8 2 Special SES 2000 Compact probleMs ccccccccccsssssceeceeeseeeceeeseeessesseeesseeeeesees 169 8 3 SESWIN error MOSSAGES cccccscseececcencecsseeecceeececceneeccuseescaeeeeccensecceseessesees 170 94 INGO WIC OMMING dalasi a a 172 8 5 SESWIN functions seem not to work cccccccsececcesseeceeeeecseeeeceuecesseueeeseaeeessaaees 173 8 6 Signal detection Problems cccssccccssececceeeccceeeeccceececceueeecseeecsueeecseueeesseeeessaaees 175 9 PIICMePOOIGNINS aia et atelier ade ues nese et eae 177 8 8 Motion Sensor Problems cccccseeccccceseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeesseueeeese
148. d DSM Transmit Cycle a ai Range Length Based Principle of Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Burst Pulse Mode Transmit pulses for normal echo sounding ping rate depends on range end respective water depth a Deep Sea Pulse Mode ping rate depends mainly on range length b and burst mode c In this example burst mode duty cycle was set to 70 active time Omitted pings are placed at the beginning of basic transmit cycle For this burst mode settings have to be made within the SESWIN menu Options System Settings Synchronisation as shown below The burst mode used here has to be switched on in the ats Transmit tab of the SESWIN parameter menu f External Trigger System Settings Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scan Spaten Files View Marker Map Beam Steering Gain Range Process f Alternating Trigger Depth Threshold General Transmit LF Freguency 10 kHz e a LF Pulses 2 I I 1 I l Burst Mode Setti uret Mode Settings Percentage of active time frame E fa Cancel W Burst Mode EM710 MBES settings The MBES has to be set to external synchronization To avoid the MBES picking up the SBP interference it would be useful to set gates for seabed detection as shown in the right hand picture Gate function is not available within the EM710 operating software It is only possible to reduce the range Innomar Technologie GmbH 146
149. d is in kilometers hour Checksum ZDA Time amp Date UTC N DO Of WDB GPZDA hhmmss ss xx xx XXXX XX xx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Local zone minutes description same sign as local hours Local zone description 00 to 13 hours Year Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Universal Time Coordinated UTC Checksum Innomar Technologie GmbH 234 SES 2000 User s Guide RMA Navigation data from present position GPRMA A IHH N III 11 W SS s ccc vv v W hh Data status Latitude N S Longitude W E not used not used Speed over ground in knots Course over ground 10 Variation 11 Direction of variation E W 12 Checksum CO NO Of W DN O RMB Recommended Minimum Navigation Information GPRMB A x x a c c d d Illl ll e yyyyy yy f g g h h i i j kk 1 Data Status V navigation receiver warning 2 Crosstrack error in nautical miles 3 Direction to steer L or R to correct error 4 Origin waypoint ID 5 Destination waypoint ID 6 Destination waypoint latitude 7 Nors 8 Destination waypoint longitude 9 EorW 10 Range to destination in nautical miles 11 Bearing to destination degrees True 12 Destination closing velocity in knots 13 Arrival status A entered or perpendicular passed 14 Checksum Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 235 RMC Recommended Minimum Specific GPS TRANSIT Data CO NO Of W DN O 10 11 12 GPRMC hhmmss ss A Ill lLa yyyyy yy a X x x x ddmmyy x x a hh UTC of po
150. d navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print integrated TFT Display external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format network LAN output of echoprint data and auxiliary data for HYPACK integration or additional monitoring Data Input Serial RS232 or network input for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format Serial RS232 input for motion sensor data used for heave and roll pitch compensation Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz power consumption lt 400 W power on current surge duration lt 20A lt 0 1sec power line fused 2 16A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C lt 70 non condensing rel humidity baal The SES 2000 light system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance faa gt electrical interference EN a emission here Option 100kHz Side scan Extension For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 211 A 2 3 SES 2000 standard Specifications SES 2000 standard Dimension and Weight Main Unit Dimensions
151. de 2 3 1 SESWIN Button Bar Hot Keys jg File Mode F2 Exit Program Alt F4 System Mode F2 Marker F12 Open File F3 Next Profile F11 Transmitter F4 Echoprint Mode F10 Record F5 Split View F9 Printer F6 HF Chanrel F7 Quick Controls LF Channel F7 File Mode For replay only System Mode For data acquisition Open File To load files for replay only disabled during system mode Transmitter Start Stop sound ping should always be active for data acquisition Record Start Stop recording data Printer Start Stop online printing Quick Controls Switch on off reduced Parameter Menu Quick Controls LF Channel Display echoprint of low frequency LF data HF Channel Display echoprint of high frequency HF data Split View Display echoprints of both low and high frequency data simultaneously Echoprint Mode There are two modes for echoprints Amplitude and High Resolution Next Profile Increase profile counter by 1 and restart data logging if active Marker Manual event marker with annotated number Exit Program Press to exit program Both channels are recorded regardless of this selection These options only concern which channels are displayed and printed Ifthe split view button is pressed one channel is displayed in the left side of the Echo Screen Plot and one channel in the right side Whichever button out of the LF Channel or HF Channel is also pressed will determine
152. defined units Factor for conversion from meters km 1000 Kilometer mi 1609 344 International Statute Mile m 1 0 Meter fath 1 8288 International Fathom dm 1 10 Decimeter ch 20 1168 International Chain cm 1 100 Centimeter link 0 201168 International Link mm 1 1000 Millimeter us in 1 0 39 37 U S Surveyor s Inch kmi 1852 0 International Nautical Mile us ft 0 304800609601219 U S Surveyor s Foot in 0 0254 International Inch us yd 0 914401828803658 U S Surveyor s Yard ft 0 3048 International Foot us ch 20 11684023368047 U S Surveyor s Chain yd 0 9144 International Yard towgs84 parameter description With the towgs84 parameter datum shifts can be approximated by 3 parameter spatial translations in geocentric xyz space or 7 parameter shifts translation rotation scaling In the three parameter case the three arguments are the translations to the geocentric location in meters For example the EPSG database uses the following 3 parameter towgs84 for the Greek GGRS87 datum to WGS84 towgs84 199 87 74 79 246 62 A 7 parameter example from the EPSG database is used for transforming from WGS72 to WGS84 towgs84 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 554 0 219 The 7 parameter case uses delta_x delta_y delta_z Rx rotation X Ry rotation Y Rz rotation Z M_BF Scaling The three translation parameters are in meters as in the 3 parameter case The rotational parameters are not in physical units They are something like the sine of the rotationa
153. diment layer without any step like changes of acoustic impedance In the right hand part of the echoprint there is suddenly some penetration and sediment structures become visible in spite of an increased seafloor backscatter aan a Te a i N Lp at yc val T Li pr bala La wha Mat ith a to cet bing Sih ages ee ae ce i A Ae ee TE ra rh is Ba i A j i PE ne a E ee i sob ain A ns a Cie a i r s i Pe ee yee re Ea a LANN Ta aT a l Echo print example with varying gas concentration in the upper sediment layers The echoprint example above shows an area with strongly varying gas content There is suddenly a strong backscatter about 1m below seafloor Almost all sediment layers vanish below this high backscatter area There is no basin effect like in figure 1 indicating the gas concentration changed very fast Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 197 9 7 2 Gas bubbles from an acoustic point of view Gas concentrations in the sediment cause a high attenuation and back scattering of the sound waves If there are only thin mud layers filled with gas bubbles the influence of the attenuation can be neglected in comparison with the influence of the back scattering The attenuation as well as the back scattering strength depends on the wavelength related to the gas bubble size Depending on their dimensions gas bubbles will be resonant at different frequencies At the resonance freque
154. ducer SES 2000 light e main unit e transducer SES 2000 standard e main unit e transducer Innomar Technologie GmbH 1 SES 2000 User s Guide SES 2000 medium e main unit Eales RE 4 Akaz EE K ee Ts Be he e extension unit e transducer SES 2000 deep extension unit main unit power supply SES 2000 ROV e main unit e transducer 2 1 1 SES 2000 Transducer Installation Very important is the proper installation of the transducer to avoid noise coming from the ship or flow noise at the transducer s surface see section 3 10 on page 34 for details Make sure the transducer is fixed firmly to the ship using a stable mounting bracket and or pipe The transducer has to be below water level and must not vibrate while travelling Try to avoid any noise going to the transducer The system must not be switched on if the transducer is not installed properly and placed below water level For most systems the transducer cable is moulded non removable to the transducer and cannot be removed Only for the SES 2000 ROV system there is a plug socket connection at the transducer Innomar Technologie GmbH ee ee A 2 1 2 SES 2000 Main Unit Connectors Detailed descriptions of the front panels of the different SES 2000 systems are given in sections 3 2 to 3 7 The connectors and switches are described in section 3 12 on page 39 SES 2000 compact power control LEDs Fuse Trigger In Out main power switch
155. e 2 Multi Frequency Mode Dual Range Mode Burst mode has to be activated separately within the Transmit Beam Steerng Mode parameter menu see section 5 8 2 on page 59 Allow High Pulse Rate Deep Sea Pulse Mode Both Deep Sea Mode and Burst Mode are possible wit internal Burst Mode trigger only They will not work correctly if the system is triggered Chirp Made externally Transmit Pulse Data Sampling Range at me Ea c E eee i Basic Transmit Cycle Range Based DSM Transmit Cycle a gt ie Range Length Based Principle of Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Burst Pulse Mode Transmit pulses for normal echo sounding ping rate depends on range end respective water depth a Deep Sea Pulse Mode ping rate depends mainly on range length b and burst mode c In this example burst mode duty cycle was set to 70 active time Omitted pings are placed at the beginning of basic transmit cycle There may be artefacts produced by water column features e g fish schools or additional multiple echoes in the echoprints if Deep Sea Pulse Mode or Burst Mode is used To check if features visible are real you should switch off deep sea pulse mode temporarily Some examples of different trigger and transmission modes are given in section 7 13 on page 139 Innomar Technologie Gm
156. e teie Dual Fahge transmission of several System Synchronisation Files View Marker i beams with defined directions forward Manual Angle Setup Beam Steenng Principle eea angles iS possible aie B 3 k Master Channel Save Scheme The master channel will be anded oar gt Right View used for water depth Angle 2 0 C Center View gle 1 STN calculation mpgs er B Angle Settings can be stored to files bo Z TE and reloaded oo A i The beam steering mode is po switched on off in the oo Transmit tab of the SESWIN oo z Parameter menu Cancel Manual Angle Setup You define the number of Beams you will use during the survey The maximum number of beams is set to 9 The more beams are used the lower the resulting ping rate gets e g ata total ping rate of 30pps and 5 beams there are only 6pps for each beam Angle1 Angle 9 As many angle fields as you have defined in the Beams box will now be enabled You can set each angle manually in a range of 16 in 0 5 steps However only the first three angles Angle1 right view Angle2 centre view and Angles left view will be displayed in the online mode The signals from the other angles can only be analysed in File Mode or with the post processing software ISE Master Channel The master channel is used to determine the water depth and getting parameters for automatic gain control Usually a 0 beam should be used
157. e GmbH 216 SES 2000 User s Guide SES 2000 deep Technical Data Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver dimensions of active area about 0 70m x 0 75m half power beam width for transmission 1 5 Transmitter primary frequency about 35kHz secondary frequency 2 3 4 5 6 7kHz user adjustable pulse width 0 25 3 5ms user adjustable transmission pulses CW Ricker Chirp Multi frequency Signals Option Chirp Signal LFM 2 7kHz 3 7ms Transmitting channels 48 Roll Pitch Compensation and Roll and pitch compensation by electronic beam steering in a range Depth Range 5 6 000m optionally up to 11 000m up to 200m depends on sediment frequency noise level Accuracy 35kHz 0 15m 0 02 of water depth 4kHz 0 20m 0 02 of water depth at pulse length 0 25ms Trigger Input TTL max 12V low active SES 2000 as slave Data Record 2 channels primary frequency HF and secondary frequency LF both channels envelope and full waveform for the selected range Digitisation 16 bit 96KHz for full waveform data Signal Processing e bandpass filters adjusted automatically according to transmission pulse characteristics noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing DSP for improved resolution and penetration into sediment e g matched filtering and spike removal heave compensation and swell filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoprints replay of previously recorded files Dat
158. e as possible to the SES 2000 transducer If that is not possible make sure the lever arm correction of the motion sensor is set correctly It is also important to ensure the right orientation of the motion sensor related to the transducer After installing the motion sensor some settings are necessary within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor see section 5 11 4 on page 82 of this manual To check the mounting orientation you can perform the following motions with the sensor and observe the changed data in the MS window in the SESWIN screen e lift the sensor heave value goes negative e tilt to starboard right looking forward roll value goes positive and increases e tilt backwards transducer goes bow up pitch value goes positive and increases lf heave values have the wrong sign this can be adjusted within the SESWIN motion sensor dialog see section 5 11 4 on page 82 The performance of the motion sensor can be improved by providing additional information like heading course or speed of the ship Therefore some motion sensors are able to use NMEA sentences sent by a GPS receiver to get the necessary information Often the VTG sentence is used to obtain the speed of the vessel For the MRU Z motion sensor INNOMAR provides a splash water proof housing intended to protect the MRU placed outdoor e g on deck The housing has no depth rating and must not be installed under water
159. e duration lt 25A lt 0 1sec e power line fused 2 16A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C lt 70 non condensing rel humidity The SES 2000 medium system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance against electrical interference EN 55011 emission standards For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 215 A 2 5 SES 2000 deep Specifications SES 2000 deep Dimension and Weight The SES 2000 deep consists of two system units and an additional power supply unit Main Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 44 cm Housing 19 inch 9U Weight about 50 kg Extension Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 44 cm Housing 19 inch 9U Weight about 60 kg Optional housings for rough environments are available Power Supply Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 50 cm x 21 cm Housing 19 inch 4U Weight about 40 kg Transducer The transducer consists of 3 sections each with Dimensions LxWxH 77 cm x 24cm x 18cm Weight about 60 kg Weight incl 30m cable about 75 kg The transducer cables are moulded non removable to the transducer sections The cable length is fixed to 30m Innomar Technologi
160. eaeeeesaaaeeeesaaees 178 9 VEChiNICal Background eeren a eleniieceeeehees 179 Ol SUID DOOM TONINO ara N tina 179 9 2 Important Properties of Sub bottom Profilers cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 180 93 TANSAUCECMAlAClelSIICS esestetareh aces dees tage ee E E A aE 183 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 7 9 4 Nonlinear Parametric Sub bottom Profilers cccccccccseececeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeees 186 9 5 SES 2000 Parametric Sub bottom Profilers 0 0 0 0 ceccccecceceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeens 190 OG nal PROCCSSING asana eatich Gis alae ceseasieu a a 192 9 7 ACOUSTICS of gassy sediments cscs aani 195 Appendix AI SES 2000 Transd UCErS ers a 201 A 1 1 SES 2000 compact light standard Transducer ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaees 201 A 1 2 Transducer Mounting Bracket Option cccccsseeeeeeceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeessaees 202 A133 SES 2000 medium TranSGuCer sisicccecwwsesceaseeiuses eteboc a 203 A 1 4 SES 2000 deep Transducer cccccccccccssececceeeecseseecsceseecceseecseseeesceneesceseessesees 205 A 1 4 SES 2000 ROV TransdUCeEr iecerei araisa eantel iaria ace ie ahead eee 206 A2 SES 2000 Specifications csr a a a 207 A 2 1 SES 2000 compact Specifications nrin a He eee a 207 A 2 2 SES 2000 light Specifications c sccccccscceccisessccesedsveceetss causes arpa EEEE Er 209 A 2 3 SES 2000 standard Specifications ccccccesssceccs
161. ear b and transducer shifted to the ROV front c Placing the SBP transducer in the front part of the ROV may increase interference with multi beam and sidescan that are often placed in the ROV front part too This issue can be solved by operating the systems synchronized as shown in section 7 13 2 on page 140 In summary to get best results with the SES 2000 ROV sub bottom profiler e the transducer has to be placed in front of the ROV frame as far away from and in front of all noise sources e the transducer has to be mounted using rubber between all metal connections rubber mounts may be used as well e synchronized operation will reduce interference with other acoustic systems Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 113 7 3 How to install and set up a motion sensor The SES 2000 systems are equipped with a serial interface to attach a motion sensor For the motion sensor an external power supply is necessary INNOMAR usually provides a power supply together with the motion sensor The SES 2000 compact and light systems can use the heave information only but in the SES 2000 standard medium deep and ROV systems the roll pitch and heave information is used depending on the transducer type For these systems a sensor with accuracy for pitch and roll better than 0 5 should be used Please make sure to use a sufficient power supply and to set up the sensor interface correctly as described in this section Some
162. eceeeceeseeeeseeeeeesseeeeeesseseeesseaes 211 A 2 4 SES 2000 medium Specifications cc ccccccccccceceseeceeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeesaaaes 213 A 2 5 SES 2000 deep Specifications isnie inini a i 215 A2 SES 2000 ROV SpPECNCAIONS rsi a AS 219 AS OES Z000 ODPIONS recria E ERTES 223 A 4 ISE Post Processing Software cccccscccssseceeeessseeeeeeeseseeeneeees 227 A 5 Supported Motion Sensors and Printers ccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 A 6 Motion Sensor HOUSING vssinsscmsasensoieedesapeiararestendeaemiseesneianamoasises 231 A7 GPS NMEA SENtENCES essnee iea enea rE 233 A 8 Motion Sensor Data Formats cccccccseeceeeeseeeeeaeeesseeeeseeesaaeees 237 A9 GPP Emor CodeS aaraa aider 243 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH a ccc 1 Important Hints Attention Please 1 1 Safety Rules For the user s safety and the safety of any person nearby the SES 2000 systems and for the non damageable operation of the system it is strictly pointed out that gt THE SES 2000 DEVICE MUST ONLY BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED STAFF gt CABLES MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED OR DISCONNECTED WHEN THE HARDWARE IS SWITCHED OFF ESPECIALLY THE TRANSDUCER CABLE gt THE EQUIPMENT MUST ONLY BE USED IN SYSTEM MODE IF THE TRANSDUCER IS CONNECTED TO THE SES 2000 DEVICE AND IS SITUATED IN WATER gt IT IS FORBIDDEN TO SWIM OR DIVE WHILE THE SES 2000 SYSTEM IS WORKING gt T
163. ectronic Units The SES 2000 electronic units have to be placed on a dry and safe place After installation the units have to be fixed with a suitable method to avoid mechanical destructions during rough seas Make sure not to cover the cooling slits There are fans inside the unit and a proper airflow is necessary to avoid overheating during operation The devices are not water protected Therefore don t use the system outside and avoid all situations where water can get into the system unit The power supply voltage has to be in the range of 110 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Before using your generator make sure that it can provide enough power for the SES 2000 system see technical parameters in the appendix don t forget the switch on current Having activated the SES 2000 system by switching the power on check first if all power supply LEDs are lit If not switch off the system immediately and contact INNOMAR or an authorised person During transport and storage the transport cases provided by INNOMAR should used These boxes are splash water proof and filled with anti shock foam If the system is not used for a longer period of time you should power on the electronic units at least every six months to avoid damages at the capacitors There is a fuse in the front panel 10 Amps slow and additional fuses 260mA are placed behind a small cover plate in the rear panel of the SES 2000 electronic units The fuses at the rear protect the transmit
164. ed Ruler Usually have Draw Lines and Draw Text boxes ticked This plots automatically spaced horizontal lines and annotation on the echo plot screen Draw Lines Creates meter lines on the screen and on the printer The number of lines depends on the chosen range Draw Text Annotation meter values will be shown on the screen and on the printer Show Range in msec The range ruler can be labelled using milliseconds instead of meters Range Start and Range Length values in the Range parameter menu will be given in meters regardless the ruler setting to msec or meter Manual set up If checked the automatic line spacing is overridden and start distance of meter lines on the screen and printer can be set manually Text Marker lines and ruler lines normally have text annotation that can be optionally transparent or with a filled background for easier readability gt Both Draw Lines and Draw Text should be ticked by default Innomar Technologie GmbH 70 5 10 5 System Settings Marker System Settings Multi Frequency System Synchronization Files Position Data Source SIS String Number for Position SIS String Number for Y Positior S15 1D for Fix Marker 515 E for KP Market SIS ID for optional 2nd Label f W Exclude ero Values Cross Lines Cross Line Definitions Dual Range Side Scan View Beam Steering Marker Draw Track Marker way units 10 00 Draw Ti
165. eem not to work 8 5 1 Activating of transmission is not possible You cannot switch the transmitters on off F4 e The transducer connector might not be plugged in correctly There is a safety circuit that detects if the transducer is plugged in or not If no transducer is present an error message Transducer not plugged pops up In any case there is a warning message coming up if the transducer is switched on to remind you that the transducer has to be covered by water during operation e Systems equipped with extra robust housings optionally MIL standard housing have a sensor in the rear panel to detect if the cover is removed To prevent the system from over heating the transmitters can t be switched on if the rear cover is not removed Make sure the cover is removed and the distance sensor is not too close to another object The sensor s signal is shown in the SESWIN status bar 72 02 2002 06 4508 INT PRN no paper Buf 0 Page 0 O HD 5E59MB MS no data SIS no data e For some systems there is a temperature sensor to detect overheating electronics To prevent damages transmitters are switched off in case of too high temperatures and a warning message is shown on screen To avoid this problem you should take care of proper cooling and free airflow around the electronic unit s In very warm environments the electronic unit s should be placed in air conditioned rooms A faulty fan in the rear panel of the electronic unit migh
166. el Low Frequency SESWIN master channel as displayed on the SESWIN F s25 FileName screen together with some status information All important Pc ProfileNumber 1 i ura gt Signal Trigger SOuUrce internalfinternal SES 2000 system settings are listed In the Ping as Information tab Ei BeamSteeringMode off B MultiFrequencyMode ofF i i SideScanMode off HighEnergyMode off ChirpMode off Deep5eaPulseMode off 5SE5 PC DateTime 06 05 2009 14 42 11 515 String1 515 Stringz SIS Strings SIS String4 SIS Strings 515 Stringe S15 String 515 Strings Measure Skart Length m 30 15 Depth CH1 CH2 cm 3200 3140 TransducerDepth cm D Frequency CHi fCH2 Hz 10000 100000 TePulseLength us 100 LFSinusPulses 1 Gain CH1 CHe dB ao Sound velocity m sec 1500 MSHeadingfngle 1 107 M5PRollongle if107 D MSPitch ngle 1 105 D MSHeavevaluelcrm D HeaveCompensation on TCP IP Client The Messages tab of the TCP IP Client window shows all client activity This information might be useful for troubleshooting Try to connect to Broadcast Server Connected to Broadcast Server 192 168 Disconnected trom Broadcast Server 192 Client disconnected Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 153 7 16 How to remote control a SES 2000 SBP If it is not possible or inconvenient to have the system operator in front of the SES 2000 main unit the system can be remote controlled
167. eral Remarks lt is possible to synchronize two or more systems via trigger pulses in order to reduce acoustic interference There are Trigger IN and Trigger OUT BNC connectors placed at the front panel of the SES 2000 main units that can be used to get TTL compatible trigger pulses to from other systems In the case of triggering another system the Trigger OUT has to be used The triggered slave system has to be able to handle the rather high ping rates that are produced by the SES 2000 system It is also possible to trigger the SES 2000 system by another system using the Trigger IN connector Every time a trigger pulse is detected at Trigger IN the SES system is forced to Innomar Technologie GmbH 140 SES 2000 User s Guide transmit a sound ping or a burst of sound pings Please keep in mind that the ping rate of the SES 2000 system may be decreased significantly and therefore the lateral resolution and the data quality may be decreased too Therefore it is generally recommended to have the SES as master sending trigger pulses to the slower systems The principle of the different trigger modes that are possible with the SES 2000 systems are described in chapter 6 on page 99 of this manual 7 13 2 Running the SES 2000 triggered by a Multi Beam System In shallow water or in ROV applications the MBES should trigger the SES 2000 SBP How to set up this is exemplified by the Reson SeaBat 7125 MBES that cannot be tr
168. ese new files are processed as normal SES data files and can be loaded and replayed with the SESWIN software or the ISE post processing software Load A file can be opened directly by clicking the Load button within the Cutter dialog Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 5 15 Other Tools Info Screens 5 15 1 Program Capture SESWIN window Help mae Options File Browser File Cutter Capture Window Strg Exit Windows file dialog 5 15 2 Help System Info Program Options ae z System Info The System Info box informs you about the hardware and software releases and serial numbers and about the implementation of special options as well as about the host software releases System Information Date amp Time 95 The Capture Window item creates a screen shot of the SESWIN window and stores the picture in BMP or GIF format The file name and location is retrieved via the standard 22 08 2007 14 09 33 x SES 96 SES 2000 System Type Revision HW Serial Ho DSP Serial Ho DSP Hodel Frequency List compact 773 Bo 397 4 5 6 Gs 10 1 MultiFreg Module no HighEnergyPulse yes HighPulseksate yes DeepSesaPulse Yes Ext Trigger no SideScan Fes The actual status of the operating system is also listed This window is a valuable information source in case of any problems with the system wee SES 96 SES 2000 Ho
169. et Correction replace the original ones Cancel Position and Heading Data Source Selection of SIS string IDs for X Y and Z position values as well as the heading data input To avoid wrong position values as a result of transmission errors zero values can be excluded The position values are unit free preferably metric coordinates UTM should be used There is an online conversion into UTM coordinates available see section 5 11 7 on page 85 The SIS extraction has to be defined in the Options System Interfaces SIS dialog see section 5 11 1 on page 77 The heading value can be obtained either from the motion sensor connected top the main unit or from any SIS string as defined in the Options System Interfaces SIS dialog In any case the heading value has to be in degrees as a number with decimals Offset Correction for Transducer For the transducer an individual offset for the X Y and Z value can be selected The offset values are unit free but should refer to the same coordinate system as the incoming SIS data stream defined in Position and Heading Data Source above meters for UTM coordinates The offset values are pointing from GPS antenna to transducer position the GPS antenna is supposed to be at the origin 0 0 The x axis points starboard and y axis points forward gt Make sure to select the same coordinate system for the SIS and the offset values Coordinate Processing The only op
170. et and length are taken to extract the SIS strings e Position Number logical position within the NMEA sentence of the SIS value separated by comma assuming the sentence ID has position 0 e Offset Usually the first character after the separating comma is taken as start position for string extraction offset 0 Sometimes it is useful to apply an offset to start with another character position for instance to drop leading zeros because of the limited length of the SIS strings Offset may be used as well to tweak non standard NMEA sentences If for instance different data strings are received and one of them is not NMEA conform but could be read by space separated or absolute position mode see below you could treat all as NMEA For the non standard sentence you can set position to one and set a large offset according to number of chars to omit in front of the value needed from the data set e Length Number of characters that have to be extracted counted from the start position It is also possible to extract more than one logical NMEA position into one SIS string Example To extract GPS quality numbers of Satellites and DOP value into one SIS string you could define NUEA1 GPGGA address NMEA1 position 6 offset 0 length 8 If the Mode is set to Space Separated the following parameters have to be defined e Position Number logical position of the SIS string to be extracted within the space separated incomi
171. ethods to the data print the data digitise layers and objects and extract these data to common file formats like ASCII Data files can also be converted to SEG Y XTF and ASCII format for processing with third party software mt er Ce eke Pel Sper la a ely FF E Sens oo5 Ail E le ee fe le E hae pet r kani E dTi HO DEET EET ee A k 1h nial w a mi Phil Eph LUL pma ANTIN a n AA JT IA 5 2 10 TELERA O THN rea eee Sorel a FR gee PO coe Pe Gemma bebra depp Bom Gat La Teeter wa ee iPaper oan aL Cute ar i npes PRGA Yeah Far lors i JT 42 1M my 1 Ro ca jez it Be a Aero i Esn Re Sere eee ie eee ee O ISE screen dump example with different toolboxes opened and sediment probe data overlaid to the echoprint The ISE screen consists of the following parts e main menu e button bar e info bar shows information about trace or sample at current cursor position e g xyz position time trace number amplitude e echoprint area shows calculated echoprint e trace envelope general trace information shows envelope graph or information from trace at current cursor position e g motion sensor data transmitter and gain settings e status bar shows information about data file Innomar Technologie GmbH 228 SES 2000 User s Guide There are some toolboxes available that may be used to show the entire echoprint data file in reduced size and
172. evices are detected incorrectly e g GPS receivers are often detected as a mouse device when connected during boot up of the PC With the COM port settings of the SESCONFIG tool you can disable the automatic detection of COM port devices either for all COM ports or for the COM ports used by the SESWIN application lt is recommended to disable auto detection for SES ports at least 4 2 3 Network Settings SES Configuration Eg Itis possible to operate the SES 2000 system via TCP IP network Network Settings Network Options fe N t k ti A a auc Auto Start of Network Server f Network operation as Server f Network operation as Client Innomar Technologie GmbH 50 SES 2000 User s Guide Network Settings Depending on the settings in the Network tab additional entries in the SESWIN Options menu will appear to activate corresponding network operation modes No network operation The SES 2000 system is running standalone normal operation Network operation as Server The SES system itself in remote control mode Network operation as Client The remote PC requires the same SESWIN software but it must be configured as a client Network Options If the checkbox for the automatic start of the Network Server is checked the SESWIN software will switch into server mode on start up This is useful if the main unit is located ina server room or if you are using the SES 2000 ROV system
173. f the screen For this the interface has to be configured properly see section 5 11 1 on page 77 e Use HyperTerminal or a similar program to see what data comes out of the Depth Out serial port The depth output interface has to be configured before see section 5 11 2 on page 80 Innomar Technologie GmbH ee e Printer Interface The printer interface can be selected between LPT port and MS Windows Default printer This can be either a USB port printer or a network printer If an USB or network printer is used the driver has to be installed properly In any case the printer model has to be supported by SESWIN How to set up printing is discussed in section 7 9 on page 124 Printer Port Settings Usually the parallel port of a PC is at address 0378h If you are using a LPT port with another port address then you have to key in this address instead External SIS data source If for any reason no positioning system can be connected directly via a normal COM port it is possible to read SIS data from a file only the first line of the file will be evaluated This file may be located on a network and updated regularly from external software with SIS data strings All settings regarding the SIS interface SESWIN main menu Options System Interfaces SIS are applied in the same way as for the COM port input COM port devices The MS Windows OS has a built in feature to detect COM port devices automatically Some times d
174. f water depth 10 kHz 0 04m 0 02 of water depth TTL SES 2000 as master TTL max 12V low active SES 2000 as slave Data Record 2 channels primary frequency HF and secondary frequency LF both channels envelope and full waveform for the selected range Innomar Technologie GmbH 212 SES 2000 User s Guide Parameter Digitisation 16 bit 96KHz for full waveform data poe tor envtape data sample te depending on selected range Signal Processing bandpass filters adjusted automatically according to transmission pulse characteristics noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing DSP for improved resolution and penetration into sediment e g matched filtering and spike removal heave compensation and swell filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoprints replay of previously recorded files Data Output on line recording of envelope and full waveform data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters and navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print integrated TFT Display external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format network LAN output of echoprint data and auxiliary data for HYPACK integration or additional monitoring Data Input Serial RS232 or network input for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format Serial RS232 input for motion sensor dat
175. file names include date and tab name system Interfaces Data Bits C 6 fe g Baud Aate f 4900 38400 f 9600 57600 f 19200 115200 Stop Bits fe L Parity FOr C odd Co even Mode NMEA Compatible String Extraction Address Length NMEAT E mm Zi T SIS String SIS String SIS Strings SIS String SIS String SIS Stririgb SIS Stririgy NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT NMEAT qF 1 GPGGA MME AS GPGGL 4 Output Trigger SUS String i l HMEAS GPVTG NMEA l l allitalla b Time Synch dF SIS Stings NMEAT Oo Oa oT Fe col fa wl al hol aa co Cy mm co ey oy oy eo ol a a al GEDA Load Scheme Save Scheme Cancel 2 Save Registry Key Just in case you should save SESWIN settings made in the WINDOWS registry as well e Close all SES applications e Start the MS Windows tool REGEDIT EXE via Start Button and Run e Select the following Registry Key HK CURRENT USER SOFTWARE INNOMAR SES FOR WINDOWS e Save this key into a file via the menu entry Registry Export Registry File Innomar Technologie GmbH 120 SES 2000 User s Guide Delete Registry Key In most cases this step can be omitted But for major updates it is recommended to delete the old SESWIN settings made in the WINDOWS registry e Select the f
176. flange and on the pipe should be decoupled using elastic material like rubber plastics or wood To reduce noise caused by the mains generator the transducer s housing should be electri cally connected to the SES 2000 main unit by an additional ground wire More advise how to avoid noise going to the transducer is given in chapter 7 1 on page 109 There are two application notes available dedicated to transducer installation in general as well as mounting transducers on small boats e AN 01 Installation of Transducers for INNOMAR s SES 2000 sub bottom profilers e AN 04 Operating SES 2000 Sub bottom Profilers on Small Boats Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 37 E Elastic material Acoustic decoupling of the transducer from the vessel using elastic material between the steel to steel connections Note also the ropes to stabilize the pipe 3 10 4 SES 2000 transducer mounting bracket option Optionally there is a universal transducer mounting bracket available that can be used to fix the transducer over the side on small survey vessels see also application note AN 06 Using INNOMAR s Transducer Mounting Bracket A technical sketch of the bracket is provided in appendix A 1 2 on page 202 pipe supporting the transducer ropes stabilizing the pipe additional grounding wire to reduce electric noise Innomar Technologie GmbH 38 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 11 Main Unit
177. following picture shows how some areas are not used for the seabed detection Once the depth filter is applied the interferences are not causing wrong bottom detection anymore The method will work as long as the depth filter setting is adjusted relating to the water depth and the selected z d operating range The filter range should not be too large Screen shots below illustrate gate settings and interference on the SeaBat screen dual head version Seabead SES interference Please keep in mind to use smallest useful range and the highest possible transmit energy at the MBES to ensure highest data density and best bottom detection Main Sonar Settings Gates Settings Ocean Menu Primary Display Settings Data Recording Screen Recording 70 Module Setup gt Settings Range Max Rate l75 0m 10 0 p s a Pulse Length lo5o0B _ 50us 3 0 33 300 Innomar Technologie GmbH 142 SES 2000 User s Guide Getting the optimal SES 2000 synchronisation settings If the water depth and therefore the MBES ping rate changes the system settings have to be adapted In the following the optimal settings for different water depths are shown The Reson SeaBat 7125 MBES uses a swath of about 130 65 in single head configura tion Assuming a flat seafloor at about 100m water depth MBES bottom return would be received about 120 350ms after pinging taking 10 water depth variation into account The pi
178. ftware for the first time SES Configuration Application Mode Printer Interface f Stand Alone System fed COM Ports fe Parallel Printer Port LPT 1 f External PC selectable COM Ports f MMS Windows Default Printer COM Port Settings Printer Port Settings SIS Interhace Input Printer Port Address HE 0378 Dispi tea Cup External 515 Data Source Data Port High Speed Read from file COM Port Devices e g Mouse GFS f Disable Autoa Detection for SES ports Control Fort Multi Purpose Port Input f Digable Auto Detection for all ports f Enable Auto Detection for all ports e The necessary settings are explained in section 4 2 on page 47 2 2 3 Starting the SESWIN Software Usually you find a link on the desktop to start the SESWIN application The software is briefly described in the next section a detailed description is SES for Windows Int gt gt oon given in chapter 4 2 4 on page 50 en InnomarTechnologieGmbH s ses i s lt iCSt SES 2000 User s Guide 2 3 Operating the SESWIN Software 15 Main Menu Button Bar Hot Keys Signal Amplitude Display Depth Display SES for Windows Program Options Help z slalle l ziz a 2l Parameter is BA mare Depth Threshold pe a Menu in Range Process General Transmit Depth LF Frequency amp kHz Ruler LF Pulses 2 pTi E Echo Plot E ST S l ante i ee An TES a creen High Energ
179. g Number for LAT Fosition 2 SIS String Number for Position E You have to set the source and destination SIS string IDs Conversion Settings Standard UTM Conversion User Defined Conversion and the conversion W Enable On line Conversion param eters Input Format WGS 84 DOD DDDDDDD degrees only e g 12 422266 54 344266 Output Format Standard UTM Conversion W584 Detailed instructions how to use UTM conversion are Sample Strings given in section 7 1 2 on page Position Input LOM 0 0000000 Position Output ps 30 Position Input LAT O 0000000 Position Output Cr i Position Data Source Destination You have to set the SIS string IDs for WGS84 position data longitude LON and latitude LAT values as defined in the Options System Interfaces SIS dialog East West and North South direction have to be specified separately The destination SIS string IDs have to be set as well The new calculated X and Y position values will replace any values that are stored under these IDs Make sure not to overwrite any important values as defined in the SIS dialog Conversion Settings Enable On line Conversion if checked the conversion takes place and the X Y values are written to the specified SIS strings Inout Format You can select an input format according to your GPS data DDD DDDDDD decimal degrees DDDMM MMMM degrees decimal minutes DDDMMSS SSS degrees minutes decimal seconds
180. g for Microsoft Networks A Saree hase P Search m Folders XxX it M QoS Packet Scheduler IP address 192 168 Uik g Internet Protocol TCP IP Address e Network Connections v gt Go v Subnet mask 255 255 gt Default gateway 192 168 A 1394 Connection a ocal Area Connection Description P Connected Firewalled Connected Firewalled SERION Laiha 1394 Net Adapter elie ME 01A nForce MCP Networkin Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default Use the following DNS server addresses wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Preferred DNS server 192 168 Connect using S Network Connections TER Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Fd _ LAN or High Speed Internet Wizard Alternate DNS server Show icon in notification area when connected New Connection Wizard Network Setup Wizard Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 4 N IDI4 nForce MCP Networking Controller To verify network settings you could open a command window Start gt Run gt type cmd In the new command window type ipconfig Both computers should have unique IP addresses within the same range To check proper network settings and connection you could also send a ping command from one computer to the other e type ping 192 168 115 11 in the command window Start gt Run gt type cmd e There are 4 pin
181. ge in the Monitoring Window System Synchronization Files View Maker i bottom left corner of SES Position Data Source Map Size WIN main window SIS String Number for Position zmr Horizontal Map Size units 1 00 00 _ Position Data Source and Heading Data Source need to Lines and Targets be set correctly for using Tak Laes track plot functions Clear Load Save SIS String Number for Y Position 2 oe Vertical Map Size Y units 1 00 00 t Clear M Activate Lines in Map Load Activate Targets in Map Save W Exclude Zero Positions Cancel Position Data Source Select which SIS field contains the X and which one contains the Y position Optionally all position values that are zero may be excluded from the processing see Lines and Targets Map Size The individually adjustable horizontal and vertical map size determines the visible area around the actual position There exists also a zoom function for the small Map Window in the main screen Lines and Targets Two separate tables may be filled with track line information and target positions It is possible to overlay these lines or targets onto the map window For each table three buttons are available which allow the complete deleting loading and saving of the table data Innomar Technologie GmbH 72 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 10 7 System Settings Beam Steering Option For systems with beam System Settings steering functionality th
182. gh noise level at normal gain settings To get a better signal to noise ratio and therefore a better picture you should increase the stacking rate and you should slow down the speed of the ship Dirty active area of the transducer You have clear water and flat bottom and you cannot get the sea bottom signal with common gain settings If the transducer is situated in water for a longer time please check if the active area of the transducer is clean The transducer can be damaged if you work with it and there are for instance mussels seaweeds filth or mud on the active area You will have a high loss of the acoustical power Be careful during cleaning the active area of the transducer Don t use sharp tools The surface of the transducer must not be damaged Furthermore no oil or grease should be on the active area of the transducers Transmitters might not work If you have checked all items above and you cannot get a better signal then a transmitter board might be faulty Switch off the system and wait for at least 3 minutes Check the fuses at the rear panel If a fuse has blown replace it Make sure you feel a slight click when the fuse is pushed in to guarantee a good contact Switch on the system to see if there is a better result If the fuse is blown again please contact INNOMAR or an authorized person Innomar Technologie GmbH 176 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 6 3 Too much noise in echo prints You have too much noise in the echo pri
183. gs Percentage of active time frame 72 Cancel The trigger mode currently used is Fange 2m 27m Range 2m 27m indicated in the SESWIN status bar 30 08 2007 14 05 35 30 08 2007 13 57 09 EXT Innomar Technologie GmbH 100 SES 2000 User s Guide 6 1 Internal Synchronisation Mode With this mode the Synchronisation in Options System f Internal Trigger Settings Synchronisation has to be set to Internal Trigger SES 2000 runs free and may be used as master device to trigger t External Trager other devices The optimal ping rate depending on the range eee oa settings is calculated by the SES system Trigger Out outputs a TTL signal that can be used to trigger any other devices The negative going edge of the Trigger OUT signal coincides with the start of the ping transmitted by the SES 2000 system see figures below A signal at Trigger IN has no influence on the ping rate but may create marks on the see SESWIN Options Menu F Transducer Ping 6 2 External Synchronisation Mode To enable this mode Synchronisation Mode in Options C Internal Trigger System Settings Synchronisation has to be set to External E Trigger SES 2000 is in slave mode and waits for trigger pulses at Extemal Trigger Trigger IN IMPORTANT The system will not work if no trigger pulse is C Alternating Trigger l detected at the Trigger IN connector Signa
184. gs send and you should get something like Reply from 192 168 115 11 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 128 lf there are error messages either the cable s or router is faulty or there is some IP address mismatch Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 161 How to share a folder Usually the entire hard drive is shared on SES sub bottom SES Data Properties orofilers If this is not the case you have to share atleastthe ar oT folder that contains the survey data network To enable sharing fr this folder cick Share this e Open Computer on Windows desktop a ag ia e Navigate to the data folder a e e Right click the data folder a ea s Cicek Properties toga pamens aea sta aene ta e Select the Sharing register To configure setings fr fine access ck e Check Share this folder on the network Oo e Choose a descriptive Share name avoid blanks R TURAR This procedure is also described step by step at http www microsoft com windowsxp using networking maintain share mspx How to connect to the shared folder If you now click Start gt My Network Places or the corresponding icon on the desktop on your notebook or external PC a window will show up listing all shared folders within the network The SES 96 SES 2000 shared folder should be listed providing access for data transfer Sometimes not all shared folders are listed due to some strange behaviour of Windows network management In that case
185. h Both the high frequency bandwidth and the short near field length make nonlinear systems particularly useful in shallow water areas ho downshift ratio F 20 1 0 10 Distance rel Diffraction Length xd normalized Sound Pressure o co 23 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 189 Reverberation level Short pulses narrow beams and absence of side lobes at nonlinear systems result in less volume reverberation and less reverberation from the bottom surface compared to linear systems Thus there is a better signal to noise ratio especially in areas with siltation The backscattering strength from the seafloor depends on the roughness of the surface and on the angle of incidence To discover an embedded object the echo strength of the object has to be higher than the reverberation level The figure shows calculated echo strength thickness of the sand layer O a ON 5 20 3 and reverberation levels for a linear and a 3 Page nonlinear sub bottom profiler normalized to N 6 oe a lt the same echo strength assuming a layer of lt 60 fine sand above gravel Reverberation level onl linear i and echo strength of the sand gravel 3 80 nonlinear b d h f ti fth cr echo strength f oundary are shown as function of the ke O LU Layer Thickness m Innomar Technologie GmbH 190 SES 2000 User s Guide 9 5 SES 2000 Parametric Sub bottom Profilers 9 5
186. h new marker see also section 5 3 14 on page 55 Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 8 2 Transmit Range Process This tab sheet is used to set the frequency and pulse length of the Depth Threshold LF channel and to activate special transmit modes Frequency and recorded data directly The HF frequency is fixed to 100kKHz 35kHz for the SES 2000 deep Doron 1 oa system The HF pulse length is same as set in this menu for the LF LF Pulses 2 pulse length T E a The LF Frequency range 4 15kHz 2 7kHz for the deep system M High Energy Mode has to be chosen depending on the survey task Lower frequencies Multi Frequency Mode will achieve greater penetration than higher frequencies but with Dual Range Mode reduced resolution Higher frequencies will achieve better resolution Beam Steering Mode but with reduced penetration Usually higher frequencies are used Bi Allow High Pulse Rate due to better efficiency and better signal to noise ratio and better Deep Sea Pulse Mode resolution M Burst Made A good starting point for usual survey work is in the middle of the C Chirp Mode range given LF Pulses represent the number of cycles of the LF frequency that are transmitted The energy of the transmitted signal is increased if the number of pulses is increased That improves the signal to noise ratio but decreases the resolution The available range depends on the chosen frequency The number of pulses should be as small as possib
187. h of up to Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits 1 1 characters can be C a00 e a0 eE non E 9600 C s00 C7 C odd ras recorded with every shot r 19200 C 15200 E8 C even Incoming navigation data are String Extraction Mode written to those string Address Position ength NMEAT F nji slGPGGA NMEA Compatible positions SIS Stingi MMEAT 1 SIS Stinge MMEAT S515 Stings NMEAT 515 Sting NMMEAT SIS Stings NMEAT SIS Stringh MMEAT SIS Sting NMEAT SIS Sting NMEAT SIS String for PC Time Synchronization disabled UTE r mm zi T dh mm dF Mo qF 5D dh qF NMEAZ Output Trigger The navigation data interface BT SIS Sting f1 COM port settings and E information extraction from r received data telegrams has GPZDA to be configured properly using this dialog Predefined settings can be stored in sis files and reloaded H E E el qF Kha eR dalled delle al Load Scheme Save Scheme Cancel Detailed instructions how to set up the SIS interface are given in section 7 11 on page 131 It is also possible to get the navigation data via TCP IP network connection see section 5 12 on page 87 For checking the correct COM port settings and the incoming SIS data the integrated SIS monitor can be used see section 5 13 on page 92 This tool captures the data at the Navi gation Input connector of the main system unit using the COM port se
188. he Application Mode Printer Intertace different interfaces f Stand Alone System fixed COM Parts fe Parallel Printer Port LPT 1 fe External PC selectable COM Ports f MMS Windows Default Printer If the same COM port is COM Port Settings Printer Port Settings assigned to different interfaces SIS Interlace Input COM Printer Port Address HE 0378 a warning message appears Bebe rales Eau coM4 External 515 Data Source SES Config Check COM Port settings each port can be used only once Data Port High Speed COM Read from file Control Port COM5 S COM Port Devices fe g Mouse GPS Multi F Fort lnput oa a EUM fe Disable Auto Detection for SES ports C Disable Auto Detection for all ports Detect Data and Control Port E C Enable Auto Detection for all ports men The ports used for communication with the SES main unit can be detected automatically If the button Detect Data and Control Port is pressed the detection procedure starts and a status window shows up The data port usually is detected rather quickly It might take a bit longer to find the control port If no data port is detected please check if the SES main unit is connected to the control PC and powered on The USB driver has to be installed properly and the assigned COM ports have to be in the range COM1 COM32 Innomar Technologie GmbH 118 SES 2000 User s Guide The ports for SIS Interface and Depth V
189. he system components vary with the depth rating The system is operated remote controlled using a ship based computer that is connected to the system via network TCP IP gt For the SES 2000 ROV system there is an additional service manual available The following figure shows the main system components pressure vessel and pressure proof transducer mounted on a HIROV for operation Transducer Mounted on a HIROV Please note that you have to wait for at least 6 minutes after shut down before re powering the pressure vessel in case you need to restart the system There is an online USV inside and otherwise the internal PC would not boot properly 3 7 2 SES 2000 ROV Main Unit Pressure Vessel Power and serial s interface connector Transducer External Trigger connector Motion Sensor Pressure relief valve Data Connector TCP IP and leakage triangular plate pointing downwards to indicate the mounting position Pressure sensor and GND contact Service connector The connectors are described in detail in appendix A 2 6 on page 219 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 31 Important notes for the installation of the pressure vessel e A triangular plate pointing downwards indicates the mounting position of the pressure vessel on the ROV e Don t use the plastic handles on the pressure vessel s end cap for transportation and handling please use the special handling tool shipped with the ve
190. hoose the usage of the serial port from the drop down list e Remote Control lt is possible to change the most important parameters of the SES 2000 system via commands like start stop data acquisition This may be used to start stop different systems synchronously e Digiguartz Get pressure values from a DIGIQUARTZ compatible pressure sensor and store the value or a converted depth value into a SIS string string ID has to be chosen For the SES 2000 ROV system these depth values can be used for flying depth correction during post processing For this make sure to check Record Enabled e SVP It is possible to receive and store sound velocity values from a SVP14 15 20 compatible sound velocity probes The destination SIS string ID and the update rate has to be defined e HDT String The multi purpose port can be used to receive heading values and store the data into a specified SIS string ID Heading values may be used for transducer offset correction or side scan data processing e Depth Input depth values from other devices can be stored with the SES data and or used for the automatic range shift of the SES 2000 system For the latter the correction factor and depth offset have to be set correctly There are several data formats supported NMEA TYPE can be any comma separated ASCII string starting with a dollar character An application is given in section 7 13 4 on page 146 Record Input Data If the checkbox is tic
191. ice On line printouts can be made using a wide range of printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 for supported printers While being in system mode other printers cannot be used due to the real time requirements Incoming data is stored on hard disk The standard backup medium is an external USB 2 hard disk but backups are also possible via network connection Data should not be stored directly to external storage devices during data acquisition because of real time requirements The SES 2000 systems have serial interfaces for navigation data RS232 Nav Input and for the connection of a motion sensor RS232 Motion Sensor Input A serial ASCII output for the depth values is also available Besides that there are e Trigger Input for external triggering SES 2000 in slave mode e Trigger Output for triggering other echo sounders SES 2000 in master mode Other interfaces are optional or can be realised on customers request Technical specifications for the SES 2000 systems are given in appendix A 2 on page 207 Innomar Technologie GmbH 22 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 2 SES 2000 compact 3 2 1 SES 2000 compact System Overview ae i e Main unit containing all electronic components e Housing 1 2 19 cabinet with 7 height units about 30cm x 35cm x 40cm 23kg e External notebook PC for system control and data storage e Transducer about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm 25kg incl cable power control LEDs Fuse Trigger In Out ma
192. ice driver Sometimes installing the USB device driver for the SES 2000 compact system is not as straightforward as it should be Possible pitfalls and how to avoid them are discussed in this section 7 4 1 Installing the USB device driver If the SES 2000 compact system is connected to a USB port of the control computer for the first time a USB device driver has to be installed Found New Hardware Wizard Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by This wizard helps you install software for looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission USB FAST SERIAL ADAPTER Read our privacy policy If your hardware came with an installation CD Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for Dox Hoppe disk insert it now software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device What do you want the wizard to do No not this time Click Next to continue Click Next to continue In the next dialog you should point WINDOWS to the USB driver s location That is either the SESWIN installation CD Rom or the SESWIN backup directory on the hard disk usually C SBackup Driver Found New Hardware Wizard Hardware Installation Please choose your search and installation options hates Y The oftware you are installing for this hardware Search fo
193. igation data can be received from a D GPS system or a ship t information system see section 3 14 on page 44 i L q kh ml k Ja pl a 1 zji p i m z 2 al The input is NMEA compatible or can be configured to any ASCII format The properties of the navigation input like Baud rate Data Bits string synchronising has to be set within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces SIS The system has a RS232 serial input for the data from a motion sensor An external power supply for the motion sensor is necessary The properties of the navigation input have to be set within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor The SES 2000 compact and light systems can use the heave information only but the SES 2000 standard medium deep ROV systems use the roll pitch and heave information For motion sensor installation see section 3 14 on page 44 Depth output Option Depth OUT The SES 2000 systems have an RS232 output for the water depth a values obtained from the HF and LF channel The navigation data ees e can also be included in the output string The output is NMEA compatible and can be configured as a comma separated ASCII string The properties of the Depth output have to be set within the SESWIN software Main Menu Options System Interfaces Output PC Network PC Netwe The PC network interface can be used for data transmis
194. iggered exter nally and is typically used in shallow water Connecting Trigger Lines The trigger output of the MBES has to be connected to the trigger input of the SES 2000 SBP Trigger IN BNC connector at the front panel lf a Dual Head version of the Reson Seabat 7125 is IML AET TTT eee see es ee Se Se SS FEES oy A D S EERE 4 a ee RIE cx er a ey i used keep in mind that the two topside units Al ee Pe Eleu generate the trigger pulse There are interleaved ace 3 pulses from the starboard and portside unit To E an ee ensure best SBP performance both trigger lines aa should be OR wired to get both trigger pulses to the 7 Ene o w SES 2000 SBP RESON StB so Trigger OUT eae SES 2000 Bae Trigger IN gr RESON Port Trigger OUT units BNC connectors at rear panel Diodes should be of Schottky type to get lowest possible voltage drop SES 2000 settings Within the SES 2000 control software a trigger delay time offset can be applied via the menu Options System Settings Synchronisation if triggered externally as shown below System Settings Ed Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scar System Synchronisation Files View Marker Map Beam Steering Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger A general description of this dialog is given in section 5 10 2 on page 67 Options for external synchronisation are described in detail in section 6 2 on page 100
195. ighted green otherwise the LED is highlighted red If a client is successfully connected to the server echo sounder data from the server are received and displayed in the same form as with a real SES 2000 system If the server allows the command transmission for the active client then the same parameter settings are possible as during normal system operation It is also possible to shutdown or restart Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 91 Windows OS running on the server computer Additional Options If these buttons are used please keep in mind that the server computer might be still powered on and that you may have to restart the system and SESWIN server mode manually in case it is not set up for automatic start gt Make sure to use the same SESWIN version on both server and client computers Same serial number Otherwise the network connection will not set up properly and remote controlled operation will not be possible There is also a section regarding remote controlled operation of SES 2000 systems in the How to chapter see section 7 16 3 on page 156 Some possible TCP IP errors that may show up in the messages tab of the SESWIN network window are listed in appendix A 8 on page 243 Innomar Technologie GmbH 92 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 13 SIS Monitor MCP Monitor Options There are two monitoring windows available to catch and System Settings display data received by serial port
196. ile 1 30 08 2007 T2463 EST 3 PAM no paper But 0 Page 0 HD 3039MB The following formula shows how to calculate the maximum number of pings within one burst to avoid discarding external trigger events number of pings external trigger period delay 1ms SES trigger period All values trigger period delay are time values Note the fixed delay of 1ms Only the integer part of the calculated result is used decimals are truncated not rounded Please note that Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Deep Sea Burst Mode will not work if the SES system runs a slave triggered externally These transmission modes are for internal triggering only Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 105 6 2 5 External Trigger What to keep in mind e The external trigger signal should be TTL compatible pulses max 12V e lf no appropriate trigger signal is fed to the SES system no sound ping is generated and no data is collected The SESWIN echo screen will not scroll e The SES system is triggered with the positive edge low to high transition of the trigger pulse e There is a time delay between trigger event and transmitted SES sound ping of ca 1ms e When using ping rate increase bursts of sound pings are transmitted The time between two pings in the burst equals the ping rate that would be used at internal synchronisation e The total time required for all the pings per burst Number of pings
197. in power switch Analog Out power connector Motion sensor input Transducer connector USB control port The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 3 2 3 SES 2000 compact Transducer The length of the cable that connects the transducer to the main unit is 20m for compact and light systems The weight and the dimensions depend on the used transducer frame Typical values weight with 20m cable about 25kg dimensions about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm WHD The cable is moulded non removable to the transducer General advice for the handling and installation of SES 2000 transducers is given in section 3 9 on page 33 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 23 3 3 SES 2000 light 3 3 1 SES 2000 light System Overview gt Main unit containing all electronic components and ea control PC e Housing 19 cabinet with 8 units about 52cm x 36cm x 40cm 38kg e Transducer about 30cm x 7cm x 26cm 25kg incl cable Technical specs and a sketch of the transducer are given in appendix 3 3 2 SES 2000 light Main Unit Depth Output 10 4 TFT Display USB ports Navigation Input Keybord Mouse connectors Motion sensor Input Video Output PC Network System Printer Hotkeys connector Display Control Analog In Out Transducer Power control Fuse main power switch Trigger In Out GND connector LEDs and power connector The switches and connectors are described in
198. ined in a range of 1 to 600s Draw Fix Marker lf checked markers are drawn based on changes of a SIS string value specified on the left SIS ID for Fix Marker Only integer values are possible for increments The marker line will be labelled with this SIS string Draw KP Marker lf checked markers are drawn based on changes of a SIS string value that has to be specified on the left SIS ID for KP Marker Increments are given and used including decimals The marker line will be labelled with this SIS string Use Trigger Inout for Event Marker lf checked markers are drawn if there is a falling edge on the trigger input TTL signal detected The marker line will be labelled according to the marker type Optionally a second label is used if specified SIS ID for optional 2 label Cross Lines f set vertical markers will be plotted on the crossings with these lines Define or load a list with position information of specified lines that may cross the actual survey profiles At any position where these lines are crossed a marker will be drawn into the echo plot together with the Cross Line Name from the table Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 71 The marker function can be enabled or disabled within this dialog There are three buttons available for loading saving and clearing the whole table 5 10 6 System Settings Map System Settings This refers to the Map option Multi Frequency Dual Ran
199. ings in one sync pulse to 2 in the SES 2000 synchronisation settings The number of pings should not be higher than the number of SBP cycles fit into one MBES cycle Otherwise the pulse train is generated at each recognized trigger event as explained in section 6 2 2 on page 101 This may result in increased interference with the MBES The following table summarizes calculations and system settings for different water depths For all examples a MBES swath of 130 like Reson SeaBat 7125 and a water depth of 10 around the given mean is assumed like in the example above All calculations based on smallest possible range for the MBES for the given water depth If the actually used range is larger or the MBES head is tilted dual head system maybe more than one SBP ping would fit into one MBES cycle To get best results keep in mind to use smallest possible range length at the SES 2000 SBP Water depth m 10 20 100 MBES bottom return ms 12 35 24 70 120 350 MBES centre swath ms 12 17 24 35 120 170 MBES max ping rate ms 50 85 370 MBES max ping rate Hz 20 11 2 7 SES 2000 range start m 8 16 80 SES 2000 range length m 15 20 60 SES 2000 range end ms 30 48 140 SES 2000 bottom return ms 12 15 24 30 120 150 max SES 2000 ping rate ms 40 60 200 max SES 2000 ping rate Hz 25 17 5 Trigger delay ms 8 16 80 Trigger delay rel range 40 46 55 Pings for one sync pulse 1 1 1 How to maintain optimal values at changing
200. is not used muiltiply Run sesconfig exe to set the Control and High Speed CommPeort Innomar Technologie GmbH 170 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 3 SESWIN error messages 8 3 1 Error message COM Port not opened SES Error SES Error When invoking SESWIN an error message appears saying something like SIS COM Port not opened or Control COM Port not opened or High Speed COM Port not opened Solution Another program is active and occupies that serial port SESWIN has no access to that COM port Exit SESWIN and that other program After 10 seconds invoke SESWIN once again If the message SIS Comm Port not opened appears maybe GPS data were connected to the system during booting This should be avoided since WINDOWS might misinterpret that data and assume an additional mouse device has been detected The COM port is then occupied by a mouse driver and can t be accessed by the SESWIN software Disconnecting or switching off the GPS device from the SES system before switching on the SES can avoid this It is also possible to force WINDOWS not to assign the used COM ports automatically by making the appropriate settings in the SES configuration tool see section 4 2 on page 47 Check the COM port assignment in the SES configuration tool section 4 2 on page 47 and check also if the COM ports are available in the WINDOWS OS device manager as shown in section 7 4 2 on page 116 The SES configuration tool sesconfig exe ca
201. is useful for getting an overview about major sediment packages The high resolution processing reduces the signal to noise ratio slightly Therefore amplitude processing may be better if high noise level data are processed Amplitude processing should also be used for water column analysis for instance when looking for more suitable At high signal dynamics logarithmic tables should be preferred Especially reflections with small amplitudes can be better detected then threshold levels Linear table General Tranemit Gain Range Process Depth Threshold LF Mod HF Mode eee fe Log f Log f Lin C Lin LF Min Level HF Min Level LF SRange 10 HF SRange 10 r gt a 4 ae an wa ais eo Ar sdai Lae e fo iw bint Fo ao oe if it an f z or e E a i x a 5 ig ao i A gr en oY gi Ig 2 a a ip a ae 3 aan ete S Logarithmic table Principle of Lin and Log threshold setting left and settings applied to data right Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 195 9 7 Acoustics of gassy sediments Sub bottom profiling in shallow waters sometimes gets difficult because of gas in the upper sediment layers Especially in muddy sediments there may be free gas bubbles in the sedi ment pores or solved gas in the pore fluid This gas is either biogenic or migrates from deep sediment layers along tectonic fault lines The gas content depends on the pr
202. jor axis is used as the radius Allows selection of a standard predefined datum name The supported datum names are shown below If datum is not used it is required to specify the ellps parameter and if necessary the nadgrids or towgs84 parameters False easting is added to x value of the Cartesian coordinate May be used in most projections except longlat and geocent coordinates False northing is added to y value of the Cartesian coordinate See x_0 Central meridian Along with lat_0 normally determines the geographic origin of the projection Central parallel See lon_0 Scale factor at the central meridian The default value is 1 Specifies an elliptical Earth s major axis a Specifies an elliptical Earth s minor axis b Defines the elliptical Earth s squared eccentricity e Optionally either b minor axis e eccentricity rf 1 f reciprocal flatten or f flattening may be used e af b a Eccentricity Flattening f a b a Reciprocal Flattening rf 1 f Specifies that the projection should be computed as a spherical Earth with radius R This parameter takes precedence over the elliptical parameters Determines that spherical computations be used with radius of a sphere that has a surface area equivalent to the selected ellipsoid Used with elliptical Earth parameters Radius of a sphere with equivalent volume of specified ellipse Used with elliptical Earth parameters Spherical radius of the
203. kHz mean primary frequency and 10kHz difference frequency For comparison also the di 60 rectivity for a linear transducer of the same size is shown 60 a The figure below shows measured direc tivities of a parametric transducer distan eo ce 3m for the mean primary frequency ensehcetenem o ie and 3 different difference frequencies 10kHz param 100 kHz primary f fo 2 bee A kHz Linear Param z 0 5 2 1 05 0 1 10 1 21 E The half power power beam width for all Cc difference frequencies is nearly the same as for the mean primary frequency 6 Angle Innomar Technologie GmbH 188 SES 2000 User s Guide System bandwidth and pulse length The pulse length determines the vertical resolution if no structured pulse is used see section 9 2 3 The shortest possible pulse length is determined by the system bandwidth Caused by the small system bandwidth of linear systems mainly limited by the bandwidth of the transducer the transmission pulses are relatively long and the vertical resolution is low For nonlinear systems the absolute bandwidth of the primary and secondary frequencies is nearly the same Very short low frequent signals can be transmitted without ringing see figure below sou rce r l DON S i
204. ked the data are stored into the specified SIS string Any other value stored before in the same SIS string ID will be lost Innomar Technologie GmbH 82 5 11 4 System Interfaces Motion Sensor System Interfaces Madel Farmat Sensor Data Format f Seates MAU User C Seatexs MALI Std Possible Sensors All with EM 3000 format Serial Parameters 1920078 Mr l Be as Protocol EM 3000 binary f 755 1 Compatible status fe EM 3000 z header byte C Octans Std 1 gt roll pitch Baud Rate gt heave z2 heading 36400 Heave Correction RallPitch Correction Compensation ON Invert Heave Sign lf Roll Correction Roll Offset oo Ignore Instable Flag Transducer is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees RollPitch Angles from Motion Sensor swapped Delay pinge 0 h r ae r Filter m O Model Format SES 2000 User s Guide Defines the Model and data format as well as the COM port baud rate of the motion sensor used If necessary the heave sign can be inverted You can switch heave cor rection on off heave data recording is not affected Roll Pitch correction can be switched on off Lever arm correction is pos sible as well see next sec tion Several manufacturers of motion sensors are supported Seatex MRU TSS CMS and DMS with an accuracy of better than 0 5 and IXSEA Octans Additionally generic formats TSS 17 and EM 3000 are supported A brief description of
205. kets specification version requested by the application 10093 Successful WSAStartup not yet performed Either the application has not called WSAStartup or WSAStartup failed 11001 Host not found No such host is Known The name is not an official host name or alias or it cannot be found in the database s being queried This error may also be returned for protocol and service queries and means that the specified name could not be found in the relevant database 11002 Nonauthoritative host not found This is usually a temporary error during host name resolution and means that the local server did not receive a response from an authoritative server A retry at some time later may be successful 11003 This is a nonrecoverable error This indicates some sort of nonrecoverable error occurred during a database lookup This may be because the database files could not be found or a DNS request was returned by the server with a severe error 11004 Valid name no data record of requested type The requested name is valid and was found in the database but it does not have the correct associated data being resolved for Innomar Technologie GmbH
206. l TAB e The focus of the items within one tab of the parameter menu can be changed by the TAB key or Shift TAB e Values can be changed using the up down arrow keys small steps or the page up down keys large steps In the following description the large steps are given in parentheses if any You may also use the wheel of a wheel mouse to change the selected parameter During data collection emphasis should be placed on acquiring good data by adjusting range frequency pulse length and gains properly 5 8 1 General Range Depth Ship o Trawel o Area _ Profile Apple New Profile Reset Manual Marker Process The first boxes are used to enter header information for a survey i e Threshold vessel name Ship survey area Travel and run line Area Each within the data files displayed on playback and also on the printed record The Area name may be used as file name prefix On entering new information the Apply New Profile button flashes and the new information becomes valid after pressing this button The next run line can therefore be entered during a present survey line and then applied just before the start of the new line The Profile box can be changed with each survey line this may be useful during a grid survey Range 1 999 The Reset Manual Marker button will reset the number of a manual marker back to zero The manual marker numbers automatically increment with eac
207. l angle times the ellipsoid axis length but the exact details of how to derive these from a physical description of the rotation are not covered in this manual The internal use of these parameters match the parameters used for transformation method 9606 in the EPSG database The scaling is apparently the scale change in parts per million A more complete discussion of the 3 and 7 parameter transformations can be found in the EPSG database trf method s 9603 and 9606 In ProLat the following calculations are used to apply the towgs84 transformation going to WGS84 The x y and z coordinate arrays are in geocentric coordinates The 7 towgs84 parameters are stored in the array towgs84 Three parameter transformation simple offsets SILLS es ews S O s y i ylil towgs84 1 wlad a a 4 Cowgs 384 2 4 seven parameter transformation translation rotation and scaling RX_BF towgs84 3 Ry_BF towgs84 4 Rz_BF towgs84 5 M_BF towgs84 6 X Oue M PEL x a RZ BEVEN RY BESALEN towgss4 0 y out M BFA RZ BP eka F ylril S RZ BF ZLI t COwgsseA 1 ZOU M BE Ry BP aL E Re Be ey hiJ a E owas 34 2 Note that EPSG method 9607 coordinate frame rotation coefficients can be converted to EPSG method 9606 position vector 7 parameter supported by ProLat by reversing the sign of the rotation vectors The methods are otherwise the same Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 139 7 13 How
208. lS Jl sl als x T 5 3 1 Overview f m E Ej s Qi iA N Marker F12 Split View F9 Printer F6 HF Chanrel F7 Quick Controls LF Channel F7 File Mode F2 Displays files which have been recorded previously System Mode F2 Activation and control of the equipment during the survey Open File F3 Selects a file to open it in File Mode Transmit F4 Switch transmitters on off in System Mode If the rear cover of the water protected case is closed this button is disabled and the transmitter cannot be used Record F5 Switch data record on off in System Mode Printer F6 Switch printout of data actually displayed on the screen ona printer connected to the system on off Quick Controls Toggles full and reduced Parameter Menu Reduced menu Quick Controls may be used during data acquisition LF Channel F7 Displays the signals of the low frequency LF channel HF Channel F7 Displays the signals of the high frequency HF channel Split View F9 Displays data of HF and LF channel simultaneously Echoprint Mode F10 Toggles echoprint view amplitude envelope or amplitude changes High Resolution of the received signal Next Profile F11 Increment of profile number by 1 starts a new file if record is on starts a new page if the printer is on Marker F12 Marks the echogram at the actual position and increases mark counter by 1 Exit ALT F4 Quits program Innomar Techno
209. lated as follows pulses frequency frequency in Hz PPS pulses per second DC e PPS All these values can be obtained from the SESWIN software see screenshots below SES for Windows Program Options Help H R T E HF Depth 128 23 m Depth Threshold Ce ee ees ee Pine Rw ET ENE KT n 1 3 a oo ee a Se Oe alas se tant 4 at Es roni Depth Threshold fe General l rars i ri E ea Gain Range General Transmit Gain a s pre EEE my aar Start T came rahe me ai z ASE paaraak Ba i Ero coral sitet oath iA Te 1 b Y F i ie ia ee Length 25 m sh M Auto Range Start a EE nes s x i as a tine air an Was Adjust Ping Rate 100 P aa aaa Msg AS Tne 2 BE ainda E ete rR Te RSI T UR Seek oa w kaeni Pas an een ni Foot Print 3dB 8 1 m Deep Sea Pulse Mode ra i cig eres P Foot Print 6dB 11 m oh a ee En Ui al nina 7 r Ta fr sis ms SIG Mar ons ee Range 125m 150m LF Freq 6kH2 LF Pulses 2 Profile 1 27 08 2007 11 23 38 EXT PAN no paper Buf 0 Page 0 HD 5447MB BMS nodata SIS nodata MCF no data Innomar Technologie GmbH 46 SES 2000 User s Guide 450 400 350 300 250 Power Consumption W y 14903 x 215 200 T I T T 0 000 0 002 0 004 0 006 0 008 0 010 0 012 0 014 0 016 Duty Cycle Power consumption of the SES 2000 standard system depends on the duty cy
210. le if the detection of small reflectors or the resolution near the sediment surface are of high priority but the higher bandwidth will be more prone to noise A good starting point is in the middle of the range Special Transmit Modes For some systems there are several special transmit regimes modes available e High Energy Mode used for deeper water range start gt 50m to enable extra long transmit signals Cannot be combined with Multi Frequency Mode and High Pulse Rate Mode The High Energy Mode is disabled at pulse repetition rates higher than 15 pulses per second e Multi Frequency Mode used to transmit consecutive pings with different centre frequencies and or pulse lengths The settings for this mode have to be made in Main Menu Options System Settings Multi Frequency see section 5 10 8 on page 73 This Mode can only be combined with Allow High Pulse Rate option e Dual Range Mode used to collect data for an extended range The settings for this mode have to be made in Main Menu Options System Settings Dual Range see section 5 10 9 on page 74 This Mode can only be combined with High Energy Mode e Beam Steering Mode Toggles beam steering on off The settings for this have to be made in Main Menu Options System Settings Beam Steering see section 5 10 7 on page 72 Can only be combined with High Energy Mode and Allow High Pulse Rate o
211. les in marine sediments thus the first case mentioned above with decreased sound velocity and increased attenuation is valid 9 7 3 Gas bubbles in water In some regions there is solved gas as well as free gas bubbles in the water Higher gas concentrations are detectable using echosounders and sub bottom profilers The figure below shows free gas bubbles going from the seafloor to the sea surface Spee IEE fe TS ELMS HER Sb EE IEEE IIL I LSS AHEAD SEAT PUY PLU SINISE LE GAITA ZRH URES hae SADR A EG MIA AL S HAUAA LEA SEER R SULUN PAR RAITT ie I a IE DEB LYE MEE PL IHD E U TIE IL CB ELIE EI EVA UL EES CIE RELELI Echo print example with gas free gas bubbles going from the seafloor up to the sea surface and giving clear traces in the echoprint a video observation of these gas bubbles coming out of the muddy seafloor b c Innomar Technologie GmbH 198 SES 2000 User s Guide The last echo print below shows a so called gas flare sounded using two different frequen cies The frequency dependent behaviour of the bubbles can be used to estimate bubble size as well as the bubble concentration 20m 30m 40m 50m 60m 70m 80m North ata courtesy of International University Bremen MEE WTS Fes eee tay Le 5s SPI Gary GUAL he Oe ak A UN ok Cee ha et Ee z4 PALAT AEM 1 M it Hee DE it ii sari 90m Echo print example with gas flares sounded using different frequencies 9 7 4 Conclusions Gas sol
212. locity and B bandwidth For good vertical resolution the sound pulse used should have a large frequency bandwidth and hence short CW pulses should be used Especially in very shallow water areas the sound pulses have to be as short as possible On the other hand longer sound pulses with higher energy can be used to enhance the signal to noise ratio SNR To prevent losses in the vertical resolution while using longer sound pulses often modulated pulses like chirp LFM signals are used These pulses will then require more complex signal processing In any case the bottom and volume reverbe ration will increase for long sound pulses 9 2 4 Pulse Repetition Rate Ping Rate High pulse repetition rate is important for SNR enhancement algorithms and for object searching applications To get as surely as possible a signal of the embedded object it has to be hit by the sound beam as often as possible Vessel speed 1m s 2kn Footprint 0 31m x 0 31m ae For the example given in the figure the Pulse repetition rate Hz 5 10 30 60 resulting target hits are as follows Number of hits onthetarget 2 3 10 20 Innomar Technologie GmbH 182 SES 2000 User s Guide 9 2 5 Beam steering and stabilizing heave compensation Caused by rough seas the transducer moves during the survey The most important unwanted motions are roll pitch and heave They should be compensated if high resolution echo prints or an accurate spatial location
213. logie GmbH 54 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 3 2 File Mode F2 Pressing this button activates the replay feature of the SESWIN program Files recorded before can be displayed This mode is generally used in the office when the survey has been finished and someone wants to look at the data or print the data again and the ISE software is not available One should use the ISE post processing software instead 5 3 3 System Mode F2 Pressing this button activates that part of the program that controls the SES system and records and prints the data just received This mode is used online i e while surveying 5 3 4 Open File F3 This is only enabled in File Mode to replay to process and to print stored data The standard MS Windows file open dialog will appear for the selection of data files ses It is possible to select not only one but also a group of files for replay 5 3 5 Transmit F4 The Transmit button switches the transmitter on off It is only enabled in System Mode If the Transmit button is activated the transducer will transmit the frequency and pulses as defined in the Transmit parameter menu If the Transmit button is set the optional green SND LED at the front panel is lit The optional system hot key SND at the front panel can be used to switch on off the transmitter as well The Transmit button will be disabled if the backside cover of the optional water protected case is closed during the Syste
214. low ROV lt 500 W 16 A slow Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 47 4 Installing the SESWIN System Software There is system software called SES for Windows or SESWIN for short that is delivered together with the SES 2000 system to manage the system s on line operation data acquisition as well as data replay This software is pre installed on the built in control PC of the SES 2000 system or the notebook computer optionally delivered with the SES 2000 compact system To ensure proper operation of the system do not change the settings of the BIOS and the Windows OS and do not install any other software packages and device drivers There is a backup of all the delivered software in a folder named SBackup on hard disk C of the computer delivered by INNOMAR 4 1 Installing SESWIN software If it should become necessary to reinstall the SESWIN software please follow the procedure given in section 7 5 on page 119 It is advisable to have an administrator account for that purpose Before starting the SESWIN software for the first time you have to run the SES configuration tool first see next section 4 2 Initial Setup using the SES Configuration Tool The SES 2000 systems are delivered with a separate configuration tool sesconfig exe for basic system settings that has to be run before starting the SESWIN software for the first time 4 2 1 Password settings User Name and Password SES dur Wi
215. ls fed to the Trigger IN connector must comply with the following rules e The external trigger pulse at Trigger IN should provide the following voltage levels Low 0 0 4V High 4 5V The trigger input stage is tolerant for 12V Higher voltage levels will destroy it For the external synchronisation the following rules apply e The SES system is triggered by the positive going edge low to high transition of the trigger pulse at Trigger IN e There is a delay of about 1ms between the positive going edge of the trigger IN signal and the transmission of the SES 2000 sound ping see pictures in next section There are some older SES 96 SES 2000 systems using different settings for the external synchronisation like different voltage levels or using the negative going edge Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 101 6 2 1 Simple External Synchronisation With this mode each external trigger pulse initiates one ping of SES2000 To set the system for simple external synchronisation the delay must be set to 0 and the number of pings to 1 in the External Trigger Settings as shown in the figure below Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pE Delay as percentage of range 2 eoe a Number of pings tor one sync pulse When the external triggering edge appears at Trigger IN input it initiates a pulse at Trigger OUT The negative going edge
216. ly with the frequency used av jf Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 181 Therefore the frequency of the sound wave should be as low as possible to get the best penetration The table below summarizes typical values for the attenuation coefficient related to the wave length 2 and the sound velocity in water saturated marine sediments sediment type a Cp dB A m s coarse sand 0 90 1800 fine sand 0 80 1725 sand silt clay 0 20 1560 silt clay 0 15 1515 clay 0 08 1470 On the other hand the vertical resolution of the resulting echoprint depends on the effective pulse length as shown in section 9 2 3 For simple CW pulses which are used by most sub bottom profilers the shortest possible pulse length decreases with increasing frequency Thus higher frequencies will produce echoprints with better resolution than lower frequencies A sub boitom profiler should be able to transmit sound pulses over a wide frequency range The user should be able to adjust centre frequency and bandwidth of the transmitted sound pulses according to his her requirements 9 2 3 Pulse Length For the vertical resolution the pulse length is very important If a target is close beneath another one they can only be separated by evaluable differences in the envelope or phase of the resulting echoes A simple relation between the effective pulse length te and the vertical resolution Ar is as follows Ar C Teg 2 Tet 1 B with c sound ve
217. m Mode gt The transducer must be connected to the SES 2000 System unit and placed in water before the transmitters are switched on Operating the transducer in air may cause serious damages gt Data Recording is not switched on off automatically with transmitter on off 5 3 6 Record F5 The Record button is used to switch on off the digital recording of the received echo data Also the data from the navigation system and the motion sensor will be recorded when the Record button is pressed The actual file name will be shown on top of the application window lf the Record button is set the optional green REC LED at the front panel is lit The optional system hot key REC at the front panel can be used to switch on off the data recording as well 5 3 Printer F6 If a printer is connected to the system for online prints of the calculated echograms the printing can be switched on off using this button If the Print button is set the optional green PRN LED at the front panel is lit The optional system hot key PRN at the front panel can be used to switch on off the printout as well 5 3 8 Quick Controls During data acquisition usually only a limited number of controls are necessary e g gain settings and range start Pressing this button changes the normal Parameter Menu to a reduced one that give only access to a limited number of settings Quick Controls Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 3
218. me Marker seconds 0 J Draw Fis Marker i Draw KF Marker 1 00 00 Use Trigger Input for Event Marker Name SES 2000 User s Guide lt is possible to have marker lines drawn automatically into the echoplot based on either track made good time ora SIS string value The marker positions will not be stored in the data file but can be applied again in post processing Setting up automatically drawn marker lines is discussed in detail in section 7 10 on page 126 J Draw Marker on Cross Line Positions Position Data Source Select which SIS field contains the X and which one contains the Y position that shall be used for track way unit distance markers Optionally all position values that are zero may be excluded from the processing Marker To draw vertical lines across the echoplot to give an impression of distance or time on data Draw Track Marker way units lf checked markers are drawn on the screen of the SES 2000 system and printed on the echo plots based on the track made good The distance between two track marks has to be defined Distance is calculated using SIS strings defined for X and Y coordinates regardless the units Only by using a rectangular system UTM for instance these values will correspond to metres Draw Time Marker seconds lf checked markers are drawn on the screen of the SES 2000 system and printed on the echo plots based on the time The time between two marks has to be def
219. ment Agreement sets forth the terms and conditions under which the purchaser is licensed to use the SESWIN or ISE software Software This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale INNOMAR continues to own the copy of the software and any other copy that you are authorised to make pursuant to this agreement INNOMAR grants to you a non exclusive license to use the software together with a SES 2000 system provided that you agree to the following Use of the Software 1 The license only applies to the purchaser of a parametric sub bottom profiler SES 2000 The purchaser is not allowed to pass the software to any other user without INNOMAR s written permission 2 The purchaser may install one copy of the software on the computer integrated in the SES 2000 hardware and on another computer for post processing 3 Neither the purchaser nor any other person are allowed to do the following e give this software to any other person or institution e make any copies of this software except for one backup copy provided the backup copy is not installed or used on any computer e modify adapt translate reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the software e transfer the software by telecommunication Copyright and Trademark Rights The software is owned by INNOMAR The software is licensed and distributed by INNOMAR for surveying work on line and off line with the parametric sub
220. ment Echolot System SES 96 There are three different regions on the sheet e Head of sheet 1 e Margin for printed information 2 e Echo Plot 3 The head contains the essential parameter settings at the moment the printout has been started All following pages get automatically a new page number On the left and on the right side of the echogram margin for printed information there are parameters that change for instance the time navigation data If the user modifies a parameter a mark is printed on the echogram and the new parameter is shown in the margin The printer status is displayed on the status bar on the screen PRN The printer can be switched on off via the Button Bar or the System Hot Keys if available Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 97 5 17 Data File Formats 5 17 1 SES 2000 Data File Format The SES 2000 systems offer the possibility of digital recording the echo data in two different file formats e SES envelope data file extension ses e SES full waveform data file extension raw not available for SES 2000 compact and light systems The received signals of the high and low frequency are both written into the same file lf a motion sensor and a navigation system are connected to the SES system the sensor data are stored together with the echo data Additionally the software settings are stored within the data files The program SES for Windows SESWIN automatically creates
221. mplitude of the received signal High Resolution 5 3 13 Profile Counter Press the Profile Counter button to increase the profile number increment by 1 At the same time the recording and printing will be restarted if active You can increase the profile number counter also with the optional system hotkey CNT on the front panel The start number of the Profile Counter is set in Parameter Menu General 5 3 14 Marker Press the Marker button to set a marker and increase the marker counter A vertical line with the marker counter will be drawn on the screen This feature is useful to label interesting features in the data and looking for them during post processing There is no additional annotation available within the SESWIN software the only reference stored in the data file is the marker counter Markers can be set also with the optional system hotkey MRK on the front panel The Marker Counter is reset to zero in Parameter Menu General 9 3 15 Exit Press the Exit button to leave the program The transmitter will be switched off the recording and printing will be stopped You can leave the program also via Main Menu Program Exit Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 4 SESWIN Level Display SES for Windows Program Options Help slg s a x s gt alle als s Ge HF Depth 1 00 m These level meters can be used to adjust the amplifier settings Parameter Menu
222. n the number of sampled data points during the side scan mode In these cases some of the data are not visible on the screen and on the echo plot The size of the recorded data will not be affected by using this option When enabling Port and Starboard Plot both of the channels are plotted with the printer When this option is disabled only the Master Channel will be plotted Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 77 5 11 SESWIN System Interfaces There are some interfaces to get data from external SES for Windows sensors e g GPS position motion sensor or to send Options information to other systems These interfaces have to be alg aL set up before the survey starts via the main menu Options Login at Startup System Interfaces dialog This menu item is disabled ES i Network SES Client once data logging has started z S15 GPS Heading via Network Pork In older SESWIN versions these settings were to be found Broadcast Server in Options General SIS Monitor i MEF Monitor Screen dumps of all System Interfaces dialogs can be made by clicking the button in the lower right corner if this dialog Screen dumps are stored as bitmaps bmp at a user defined location This may be useful for documentation purposes see also section 7 18 on page 162 crcl f 5 11 1 System Interfaces SIS System Interfaces x In the SES 2000 data files 8 strings with a lengt
223. n via serial connection To use such navigation server with Network Settings SESWIN you have to activate the integrated SIS network server and to set up the Local Port address The IP of the Local Port 5001 SES computer running the SESWIN software is shown GemwerlP 19216811511 for information only to be set in the WINDOWS OS environment D MMES Server is not active 0 Clients are connected All status messages are monitored and can be seen on the Messages tab sheet c Open Network Server ey CLOSE Network If this network server is activated SESWIN tries to get the SIS navigation data via network and the standard serial port Navigation In on the SES 2000 front panel is deactivated The settings regarding this serial port are not valid any more and are disabled in the Options System Interfaces SIS dialog It is possible to connect up to 10 clients simultaneously providing all clients send NMEA sentences In previous SESWIN versions this SIS network server was called Network NMEA Server Innomar Technologie GmbH 88 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 12 2 Broadcast Server Broadcast Server Broadcast Server Network Settings Local Port 401 SewerlP 192 1685 115 11 Network Settings Local Fort 4001 Server iP 192 168 115 711 Ps Server te not active Germer is mot active 0 Chents are connected 0 Clients are connected Send AAM Data full wawe Form c Upen Broad
224. n 0 5 and the Octans from iXSEA Additionally some generic formats like the TSS 1 format and the EM 3000 format are supported Seatex MRU User MRU user binary normal format Seatex MRU std MRU standard binary normal format TSS Sensor This format is called User Configurable Format by TSS ASCII TSS 1 The TSS 1 format is compatible to several other models of motion sensors ASCII Octans Std 1 is used by Octans motion sensors ASCII EM 3000 Simrad format binary A short description of the different data format settings for each sensor model is given below Use only the supported data formats and serial parameters otherwise the system will not work correctly Format MRU User Seatex Norway This format is a fixed MRU Normal format Applicable devices are MRU H MRU 5 MRU 6 Please refer to the Seatex manual to configure the MRU for the Data OUT protocol MRU normal which looks like this The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings Digital channels 6 105 PosMondD heave mm format short 63 Roll ang format short 64 Pitch ang format short 65 Yaw ang format short 68 Heading ang format short 88 AccMonD m ss format char Token n 85 Interval ms 30 String example 71 0C 55 00 00 7F 2A FF Al B3 47 B3 45 FF 8F That means all values are hexadecimal 71 data is stable 51 data not stable Oc 12 bytes will follow 55 user
225. n be used to list all available COM ports as well There are two COM ports used by the system to exchange commands and status information called High Speed Port and Control Port These ports have to be assigned properly and available for the SES 2000 system to work For the SES 2000 compact system these two COM ports are realized via USB connection How to set up this USB interface please refer to section 7 4 on page 115 If the SES 2000 compact system is switched on before WINDOWS has finished booting on the external control computer WINDOWS might misinterpret the data sent by the system and detect an additional mouse as described above To avoid this you should switch on the SES 2000 compact system after the control computer is running and or disable WINDOWS auto detection for the used COM ports using the SES configuration tool see section 4 2 on page 47 To check if status information is sent by the firmware processor to the control PC and available you can check data on COM1 e boot the system e start a terminal program e g Windows HyperTerm e connect to COM1 using 115kBaud 8 N 1 no handshake e Now you should receive data containing the string SES 96 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 171 8 3 2 Error message No incoming data SES Warning x SES Warning Eg No incoming data Please check synchronisation mode No incoming data Control Unit A message is displayed saying No incoming da
226. ncy of the bubbles the back scattering cross section seems to be much larger than in reality So you will receive strong echo signals if there are gas concentrations in the sediment Large fluctuations of the signal strength as well as of the bottom line are typically for the echo signals This is caused by changes of the sound velocity in the sediments which depends on the gas volumes in the sediments If the gas concentration volume is 0 01 the sound velocity in the gas filled sediments decreases approximately by a factor of 2 The resonance frequency for gas bubbles trapped in the sediment is higher than for the same bubble freely moving in water The damping of a pulsating gas bubble in water saturated sediment is higher than in water too This will result in a broader resonance range To describe the behaviour of a gas bubble in water saturated sediments three frequency ranges have to be distinguished e Sound frequency is much lower than the resonance frequency The sound speed is lower than in gas free sediment and the attenuation is higher e Sound frequency is in the range of the resonance frequency The gas bubbles are pulsating and there is a strong attenuation The sound speed is changing rapidly with frequency e Sound frequency is much higher than the resonance frequency Sound speed as well as attenuation is similar to gas free sediment Frequencies used for sub bottom profiling are below the resonance frequency of gas bubb
227. ng data stream e Offset according to the description given above see NMEA compatible e Length according to the description given above see NMEA compatible If the Mode is set to Absolute Positions the following parameters have to be defined e Position Absolute character byte position of the first character that has to be extrac ted for the SIS string To obtain the byte numbers you can use the SIS monitor e Offset according to the description given above see NMEA compatible e Length according to the description given above see NMEA compatible Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 79 Output Trigger This option defines which SIS string is used for triggering the depth output see next subsection If the string of the selected SIS string number changes its content the output of the depth values and additional parameters is triggered PC Time Synchronisation SIS String for PC T ime Synchronisation l disabled 3 disabled Cancel It is possible to synchronize the PC clock to the GPS time obtained from one of the above defined SIS strings The PC clock will be set to UTC or a synchronized local time depending on the WINDOWS OS settings The ID of the SIS string containing the GPS time has to be set accordingly to the settings in the SIS main dialog If you choose UTC the PC clock will be set to the time as received in the SIS string If you choose local the PC clock kee
228. ng purposes as a profile overview list Innomar Technologie GmbH 98 Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 6 SES 2000 Synchronisation Trigger modes There are two BNC connectors Trigger IN and Trigger OUT at the SES 2000 front panel that can be used for the synchro nisation of the SES device with other acoustical equipment to minimize inferences see figure The different modes for the SES 2000 synchronisation e internal SES 2000 stand alone or master device e external SES 2000 slave device triggered by other equipment e alternating SES 2000 master device pinging alternating with external device have to be set in the dialog Options System settings Synchronisation These settings are described in the following subsections Some examples of different trigger and transmission modes are given in section 7 13 on page 139 System Settings Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scar Files View Marker Beam Steering External Trigger Settings f Intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pe 1 24 00 m Extemal Trigger Delay as percentage of range 4 Alternating Trigger Number of pings for one syne pulse Alternating Trigger Settings Internal pings prior to external device Number of extemal pinga Time frame of external device pz gt Burst Mode Settin
229. ng rate of the MBES that will trigger the SES 2000 can be assumed to be about 2 7Hz 370ms The range that should be avoided by the SES 2000 HF bottom return is limited to the near nadir MBES beams let s say 80 120 170ms The bottom return of the SES 2000 system can be expected in the range of 120 150ms after pinging The optimal point of time for the SES 2000 to transmit its sound ping would be about 50 75 of the time of MBES centre beam bottom return In the example a SES trigger delay of 66 8O0ms was chosen With a range start of 80m and a range length of 60m we ll cover a possible sediment pene tration of at least 30m and get a ping rate of about 5Hz 200ms for the SES 2000 SBP MBES Ping MBES Bottom l Range to be avoided by the i Trigger Event Return SES ping and bottom return E RO E Doman C e i ET 200ms 7 SES Ping SES Bottom Return a oe gt SES Data Acquisition Range lf the MBES would use a swath of about 150 75 or if the MBES would be set to a longer range two SES pulses plus delay would fit within one MBES cycle assuming same conditions as above This is shown in the picture below MBES Ping Range to be avoided by the i Trigger Event MBES Bottom Return SES ping and bottom return E N Ed BBA C E SES Bottom Return a gt q gt lt a 80ms 200ms 200ms SES Ping 590ms S
230. nge function can be used The auto range performance can be increased by feeding external water depth values e g from Multi Beam Echosounder using the MCP Port see section 5 11 3 on page 81 The actually achieved Ping Rate is shown in this menu window pings per second If the system is being triggered internally the ping rate will be set automatically on the basis of water depth and operating range otherwise the ping rate depends on the external trigger events An optionally available Deep Sea Pulse Mode can be activated within the Transmit menu to increase the ping rate at deep water surveys see section 5 8 2 on page 59 Some technical information on these ping rate modes is given in chapter 9 on page 179 The Adjust Ping Rate slider can be used to reduce the ping rate This can be useful to shift multiples coming from previous pings or to reduce reverberation in very shallow water Please note that this slider has a slightly different behaviour when Adjust Ping Rate minus 1 Deep Sea Pulse Mode is used ee A An estimation of the Foot Print size is also given in this tab If a water depth value from a multi beam system is obtained using the multi purpose input that value is shown at the bottom of this dialog Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 8 5 Process Depth Threshold All processing carried out from this menu is by software only and General Transmit Gain does not affect the recorded data Changes
231. nsducer The SES 2000 deep system is fitted with a transducer for both HF 85kHz and LF 2 7kHz operation For easy handling the transducer array is divided into three sections see figure The cables are moulded non removable to the transducer A technical sketch of the transducer is provided in the appendix Weight and dimensions of 1 section is as follows Dimensions LxWxH 77 cm x 24 cm x 18cm Weight in air about 60 kg Weight of cable 30m about 15 kg The transducer of the SES 2000 deep system has to be installed in a moon pool or at the ship s hull see figures below There has to be enough space behind the transducer to bend the cables The minimal bend radius of the transducer cable is 200mm There has to be water behind the transducer the sealing has to be made at the cables or standpipes have to be used SES 2000 deep transducer prepared for moon pool SES 2000 deep transducer mounted permanently in a installation streamlined dome below a ship s keel General advice for the handling and installation of SES 2000 transducers is given in section 3 9 on page 33 Innomar Technologie GmbH 30 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 7 SES 2000 ROV 3 7 1 SES 2000 ROV System Overview The SES 2000 ROV system is a pressure proof version of the SES 2000 standard sub bottom profiler intended for installation on remotely operated vehicles ROV There are systems for different depth ratings available The dimensions and weights of t
232. nsducer and motion sensor Also be aware of limitations in vessel speed as well as weather window Transducer inclination Transducers should be mounted horizontally parallel to the water surface to ensure best system performance especially for narrow beam sub bottom profilers like the SES 2000 systems A small positive inclination bow up max 0 5 is acceptable in order to ensure laminar water flow Avoid negative inclination since this may cause turbulences Acoustic coupling To avoid structure borne noise going from the ship s hull into the transducer the transducer has to be decoupled acoustically by using rubber or other damping material As said above installations flush with the hull will often cause problems due to aerated water going below the transducer Therefore blisters or gondolas should be used for hull mounting Transducers for shallow water SES 2000 systems are mostly installed over the side using a pole These transducers have bolts or holes on top of the transducer housing for mounting see figure below More detailed drawings are given in the appendix An arrow on top of the transducer housing marks the forward direction For proper operation the transducer must be fixed firmly and vertically because of the narrow sound beam Do not use long pipes with small diameters that are vibrating when the ship is moving The whole transducer must be covered by water all the time even during rough sea Innomar Technol
233. nt values as defined in the SIS dialog 7 12 2 Conversion Settings In this dialog you switch on off the UTM conversion and specify the format of input data as well as the desired output data format W Enable On line Conversion Input Format p GSA DODMe MMMM degrees minutes e g 1225 336 5420 656 Qutput Format Standard UTM Conversion GSS Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 133 Enable On line Conversion if checked the conversion takes place and the X Y values are written to the specified SIS strings Inout Format You can select an input format according to your GPS data DDD DDDDDD decimal degrees DDDMM MMMM degrees decimal minutes DDDMMSS SSS degrees minutes decimal seconds Output Format Either Standard UTM or User defined see tab sheets below 7 12 3 Standard UTM Conversion Conversion Settings Standard UTM Conversion User Defined Conversion Include one Number in Output Strings UTM Zone Number Automatic Mode Automatic Mode Meridian 1 177 Deg w Meridian 2 171 Deg w Meridian 3 165 Deg w Meridian 4 159 Deg w Sample Strings Meridian 5 153 Deg w Position Input LON Meridian 6 147 Deg w Position Input LAT Meridian 7 141 Deg w Meridian amp 135 Deg Ww w You can either select a certain UTM zone number or let the software choose the zone number automatically The chosen zone number can be included into the calculated position
234. ntical MBES water depth is now also shown in the Range tab of the SESWIN Parameter menu and may be used as reference for manual range start settings as well if not used for automatic range start Innomar Technologie GmbH 7 14 Using the Broadcast Server to display data on HYPACK lf HYPACK survey software is used the SES 2000 data can be send to HYPACK via network using the SESWIN Broadcast Server see section 5 12 2 on page 88 You can operate SESWIN and HYPACK software on the same computer or on separate computers Due to sometimes low PC performance the latter is recommended In that case both computers have to be connected by a network cable either direct connection by a cross link cable or via hub and the TCP IP settings should match each other Now you can open the SESWIN Broadcast Server Broadcast Server SES for Windows Network Settings Options Pe hae Local Port 4001 System Settings a System Interfaces Serer F 792 166 175 711 Quick Co Login at Startup amp Server is nok active 0 Clients are connected Network 5E5 Client Send RAM Data full wave form STS GP S Heading via Network Pork Broadcast Server c Open Broadcast Server S15 Monitor i MEF Monitor e4y CLOSE Network Keep the server IP address and local port number in mind since both numbers are needed to set up HYPACK Pressing the Open Broadcast Server button will start data transmission The red LED sh
235. nts if the ship s engine is running In the LF channel the echo signal is almost not detectable If the engine is switched off the echo signals are clearly to detect The pictures show an example for this problem Sai HS ERA TEASEE RESTOR Ae TASES OS Ape Go ro Sy SOE SoH sis MS SIG MaP iad a Bede HERBS alle ne og Cae Mere Range 410m 450m LF Freqg 8kHz 5 Range 315m 340m LF Freq 8kHz LF Pulses 3 Vessel engine on Vessel engine off sis ms SIG MaP i Riise dat sais eat 2 A vessel engine can produce mechanical vibration at different frequencies that is going over the mounting bracket to the transducer The frequency range of the vibrations depends on several conditions like the vibration source and the resonance frequencies of the mechanical parts If for any reason some of this vibration noise falls into the frequency range used by the SES system the signal to noise ratio can get very poor In general the transducer mounting position should be as far as possible from sources of noise and vibrations To avoid the impact of vibrations the transducer should be mechanically decoupled from the vessel using rubber material or wood Especially steel to steel connections on the flange and on the pipe should be decoupled Further advice how to avoid noise is given in section 7 1 on page 109 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 177 8 7 Printer Problems
236. nus Luyin User List User Information Enter Name User Configuration Enter Password etast ooo Reenter Password Name PO SES Master Password cel arel When the SES Config is invoked the very first This LOGIN window always shows up time a window shows up asking for a master automatically when the SESWIN software password The SES Master later on will be is invoked Password protection of the able to create new user profiles and pass SESWIN software can be enabled and words for other users disabled via Options Login at start up in the SESWIN main menu Innomar Technologie GmbH 48 4 2 2 System Settings SES Configuration Application Mode f Stand Alone System fed COM Ports f External PC selectable COM Ports COM Port Settings SIS Interkace Imput Depth Values Output Data Port High Speed Control Port Multi Purpose Port Input SES 2000 User s Guide Printer Interface f Parallel Printer Port LPT 1 f MS Windows Default Printer Printer Port Settings Printer Port Address HE 0378 External 515 Data Source Read from file es COM Port Devices e g Mouse GPS f Disable Autoa Detection for SES ports f Digable Auto Detection for all ports f Enable Auto Detection for all ports e Application Mode For the SES 2000 compact system External PC selectable COM Ports must be chosen For all other SES 2000 systems Stand Al
237. o Output Motion senso Input Keybord Mouse Depth Output connectors Printer System connector Hotkeys Display Fuse main Control power switch and power GND connector Analog In Out Link to extension Transducer Power connector Power control Trigger In Out unit SES 2000 connector SES 2000 deep LEDs medium deep The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 3 6 3 SES 2000 deep Extension Unit The SES 2000 deep system consists of two electronic blocks the main unit similar to the SES 2000 standard system and an extension unit containing additional power amplifiers Transducer connectors Link to main unit Fuse main power switch power control and power LEDs connector For the SES 2000 deep system there is an additional power connector placed right of the transducer connectors not shown in the figure above going to the separate power unit The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 29 3 6 4 SES 2000 deep Power Supply Unit For the SES 2000 deep system there is an additional power unit that has to be connected to both the main unit and the extension unit Power supply for extension unit Power supply for main unit Power OUT Power IN mains connectors connectors The switches and connectors are described in detail in section 3 12 on page 39 3 6 5 SES 2000 deep Tra
238. oductivity of the source and the possibility to leak from the sediment into free water thus from the hydrodyna mic permeability of the sediments Mud for instance is characterized by high porosity and low permeability Therefore biogenic gas is often accumulated in shallow mud Due to tempera ture dependent processes the gas concentration usually fluctuates seasonally High gas concentrations mainly occur during summer often strongly affecting sub bottom profiling During winter sub bottom profiling in the same area is often not affected 9 7 1 Echo print examples from areas with gassy sediments The following figures show typical echo prints where the layer structures are disturbed because of gas concentrations in the most upper sediment layer The figure below shows a sub boittom profile in the Baltic at a water depth of about 25 m with clearly determined sediment layers down to 20 m below the seafloor Due to an increasing gas concentration in the stronger layer red colour beneath the mud layers the other layers seem to vanish abruptly This effect is well Known in the seismic community as acoustic blanking The transition between ranges of gas and no gas looks like hyperbolas because of the strong changes of the sound velocity This is the so called basin effect k tig cies PS te is m Faiz A lt Baltic Sea Mecklenburg Bay 8kHz 375us Baltic Research Institute IOW 2001 02 07 Echo print example with varying g
239. of a sound source is the size of the sounded area of the seafloor The Diameter D of the resulting footprint can be calculated from the transducer s aperture angle or half power beam width 8 and the water depth H D 2 H tan 6 The narrower the sound beam the smaller the footprint gets The horizontal resolution of the resulting echoprint cannot be better than the size of the footprint Therefore for high resolution echoprints a small footprint and thus a narrow sound beam is needed Narrow sound beams also produce less diffraction hyperboles than wide beams The sound field of a transducer and the directivity are discussed in more detail in section 9 3 1 on page 183 1 5 SES 2000 deep 2 5 50 10 0 20 0 vertical uncertainty Depth m Footprint Radius m Radius of the acoustic beam projected to the seafloor footprint for different half power 3dB beam widths The black line indicates increasing vertical uncertainty for increasing footprints 9 2 2 Frequency Range Sub boitom profilers are used to picture sub seafloor geological structures and embedded objects Therefore the frequencies used for sub bottom profiling have to penetrate the sea floor and the attenuation in the water and in the sediments should be as low as possible The attenuation of sound waves in marine sediments strongly depends on their frequency For most sediments the attenuation coefficient a increases linear
240. of centre frequencies option for SES 2000 medium and deep systems only Can be combined only with Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Burst Mode The ping rate is limited due to the longer transmit signals of the Chirp Mode Technical information on some of these special transmit modes is given in chapter 9 on page 179 In SideScan mode the transmit tab is changed since only pulse length can be varied SES for Windows Program Options Help CEL eles z fap E ol 9 Range Process r m 60m Som 40m 30m z m Depth Threshold Innomar Technologie GmbH ee ee 5 8 3 Gain Range Process This is to manually set or adjust the gains on the LF and HF Depth Threshold Channels range 0 90 dB steps 1 9 dB Gains employed during General Transmit Gain data acquisition are final They are set by the hardware and cannot be changed during playback For some SES 2000 systems there LF 30dB HF Eds are other gain ranges or steps The necessary amplification depends on the water depth For the LF Channel it also depends on the frequency used I Eo g lf Auto Gain Control is checked the amplifiers are controlled pi automatically and the settings which have been made before manually are not valid any longer Usually the automatic gain controls should not be used the system then adjusts for changing HF Auta Gain Contral sediment properties Usually you want to see those changes LF Auto Gain Contr
241. of small sized buried objects are required Beam stabilizing will improve the results especially while using narrow sound beams At seabed slopes it is useful to direct the transmitted sound beam perpendicular to the seafloor to ensure the best penetration the best resolution as well as the best signal to noise ratio When a narrow beam is directed into the slope the position offset of the footprint has to be taken into account for data processing Beam steering is discussed in more detail in section 9 3 2 on page 185 9 2 6 Summary To summarize this section to achieve high resolution data sub bottom profilers should have e narrow sound beam half power beam width less than 3 degrees e user adjustable frequency and pulse length e pulse rate as high as possible independent of water depth e full movement compensation heave roll pitch for offshore applications Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 183 9 3 Transducer Characteristics 9 3 1 Transducer Directivity lf a sound source is larger than the wavelength of the generated sound wave the sound will be transmitted more or less in a certain direction This is described in the so called beam pattern or directivity of the transducer If the transducers dimension is small compared to the wavelength the sound will be transmitted in all directions omni directional The following picture shows the sound pressure distribution in front of a rectangular trans ducer
242. ogie GmbH 36 SES 2000 User s Guide The outer diameter of our pipe is 75 mm The diameter of the plug which comes out of the transducer is 60mm 6 holes for M bolts Height of unflexible part at the start of the cable is 200mm Transducer height Omm Transducer mounting sketch and over the side installation example The transducer should be mounted on a position where no screw water can go below the transducer Getting air bubbles from the bow water below the transducer must be avoided too If the survey is in very shallow water the lowest point of the vessel should not be the transducer The sounding area can easily be damaged if the vessel hits the ground or objects like boulders If the transducer is mounted on the side of the vessel make sure that the sound beam the side lobes of the HF beam pattern does not hit the vessel s hull see figure To avoid interferences with the noise that is produced by ship s engine the transducer should be placed as far away from the engine as possible Since the engine and the propeller is at the rear end of the ship the transducer Transducer mounted over the side should be placed at the front half of the ship At small boats with HF directivity the best place for the transducer is at the bow To avoid the impact of noise by vibrations onto the transducer it should be mechanically decoupled from the vessel Especially the steel to steel connections on the
243. ol Deep Water Amplifier The optional Deep Water Amplifier increases die gain by 12dB If an optional additional receiver array is used see section 3 9 a Pre Amplifier ocated in the receiver array can be controlled separately in steps of 20dB Two displays can assist you to find the best gain settings the Signal Monitoring Window and the Level Display sis ms SIG MAP The Signal Monitoring Window displays the envelope of the received signal The aim is to use the entire range available so that the strongest returns may just occasionally reach the maximum range and touch the top of the window An over amplified signal will result in returns consistently touching the top of the window often out of range and sis Ms SIG MAP getting cut off If the Echo Screen Plot is in Split View the Monitoring Window will display the signal from the channel displayed in the right side The Level Display shows the amplitude of the signal of both lia channels A correctly amplified signal should use the entire range er m available just occasionally reaching the upper range Red flickering HF occasionally The Overload LED on the right should not turn red Innomar Technologie GmbH 62 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 8 4 Range Depth Threshold This defines the starting point and length of data to be recorded and General Transmit Gain Strongly affects the recorded data Any data outside of the s
244. ollowing Registry Key HK CURRENT USER SOFTWARE INNOMAR SES FOR WINDOWS e Delete this key via the menu entry Edit Delete e Close the tool REGEDIT EXE Copy the new software Now you can copy the updated software to your SESWIN folder It is recommended to keep a copy of the old version Make basic settings using SESCONFIG e Start the program SESCONFIG EXE from the directory where you installed the new SESWIN software e Select a password for the Master User for example sesmasier e Make your settings based on your notes from step 1 e Close the program SESCONFIG EXE Start SESWIN e Start the program SESWIN EXE from the directory where it is installed e Logon as the Master User e Check if the application is receiving data and is working properly e Restore all settings based on the notes taken in step 1 e Close the program SESWIN EXE gt For remote controlled systems make sure to install the same SESWIN software version on both server and client computers lf a firmware upgrade is necessary you will get step by step instructions with the new firmware Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 121 7 6 How to boot and shutdown the SES 2000 systems 7 6 1 Boot Procedure Make sure that the transducers are in water and properly connected to the system Check all other cable connections Check if there is enough space behind the system units to allow proper air circula
245. on There are transducer variants available for temporary installations using poles as well as for perma nent installations Optionally side scan transducers as well as mounting brackets are avai lable Technical sketches of the transducers are provided in the appendix The transducer cable has a sea water resistant polyurethane sheet and is 09 moulded non removable to the transducer cable diameter about 20mm minimum recommended bend radius static 100mm dynamic 200mm The sketch on the right shows dimensions of the transducer connector that is used for most transducers It is fixed unsolvable at the cable dimensions about 55mm x 76mm After the mounting of the transducer it is necessary to measure the exact draught of the trans ducer The distance from the water level to the bottom of the transducer has to be adjusted in the SESWIN control software Main Menu Options System Settings System 3 10 2 Transducer handling The active area of the transducers must be protected against mechanical damages Don t put the transducer on this blue or black area to avoid scratches or getting the transducer punc tured Some of the transducer housings have supports alongside the active area to make it possible to place the transducer directly on flat and clean surfaces see figure below SES 2000 transducer with streamlined housing and supports to protect the active area that is the blue area in the photograph The active
246. on if necessary Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 123 7 8 How to display previously recorded data In general the ISE post processing should be used for displaying recorded SES data but it is possible to use the SESWIN software as well SES for Windows Program Options Help ATE a ole lo a e Click at the File Mode button e Press the Open File button or use the main menu Program File Browser e Select a SES data file to be displayed dii Some settings of the main menu and parameter menu cannot be modified in file mode They are set according to the system parameters stored in the displayed file You can change data processing parameters only Scrolling speed can be changed in the Options File Mode System Settings Files dialog see section 5 10 3 on page 68 It is also possible to have the data file displayed again and again loop files Ww Manual Replay Speed rr Innomar Technologie GmbH 124 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 9 How to print out an echogram The echo data can be printed during System Mode as well as during File Mode if the printer is fast enough on A4 or US Letter paper Printing is switched on off by the printer button or by F6 Optionally there is a system hot key PRN available for this purpose too SES for Windows Options Help Range 2m 27m Profile 1 18 07 2008 13 06 39 ExT PAN no paper Buf 0 Page 0 4 HD 967
247. on o o see section 5 11 4 on page Baud Rate SF HE BR BR PP PP hh hh HH HH 82 ao 2400 fao So er se es oo 00 00 aaea 9600 C 57600 C 15200 C 115200 Heave Corector Roll Pitch Correction Compensation OW Invert Heave Sign ke Roll Correction Roll Offset oo Delay pings 0 Ignore Instable Flag E ee f no Filter ml amp Toa is rotated PERAN by 90 degrees RollPitch Angles from Motion Sensor swapped Cancel Make sure to use the correct MS model format and baud rate Innomar Technologie GmbH 7 3 3 Motion Sensor Test Within the SESWIN screen there are two possibilities to check if there are valid data from the motion sensor received by the SES 2000 system the MS LED in the status bar and the MS window in the lower left corner of the screen SES for Windows E 3 Program Options Help 2023 m B e E meee ee La z mia rT i a e a Re e Depth Threshold ieee ari eS ae ee a a ea eee ae ne e oben eee te he Bal Range Process eb nt ns i i pin a lt a S hi EA a lt a aa General Transmit pee LF F kH se Sige oreo l ERTA m Se ate T oa see ie we ma Naa ap Pm a mache a ot High Energy Mode whl Ce aes aiu ee ne 2 nag e a Multi F for bettie Anes Multi Frequency Mode lt ma re Peete oa re ea Beam Steering Mode Allow High Pulse Aate l Deep Sea Pulse Mode TEN Range 125m 10m LF Freg 6kHz LF Fulses 2 Profile 1 i i z 27 08 2007 118
248. on sensor is set to the right protocol and to the right parameters To do that the manufacturer s configuration utility should be used For further details refer to the motion sensor s manual If the data are marked instable by the motion sensor the data will not be used and displayed in the SESWIN software You can force SESWIN to ignore this data flag by tick on ignore instable data flag in SESWIN main menu Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor This should be done only for test purposes since now potentially faulty motion sensor values are used and recorded indicated by a yellow encircled MS LED in the SESWIN status bar Since instable data are usually sent during the settling of the motion sensor after power on this maybe also indicates a faulty power supply of the motion sensor forcing the sensor to reboot again and again Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 179 9 Technical Background In this chapter some technical background regarding sub bottom profiling properties of sub bottom profilers SBP and especially regarding parametric nonlinear sound generation is given 9 1 Sub bottom Profiling For sub bottom profiling sound pulses are transmitted to the seafloor These pulses will be reflected at the seafloor at sediment layers and objects like boulders The reflected echo signals are used to calculate an echoprint showing the sub seafloor structure along the sailed track
249. one System fixed COM ports should be used COM port settings SES 2000 compact only Linking SES 2000 Compact and your PC with the USB cable provides the PC with two additional COM ports Data Port and Control Port both lt COM32 that have to be configured properly e To see which COM ports are available please see the Ports tab of this dialog Using the obtained information you can assign the ports in the System tab e tis also possible to use the Detect Data and Control Port button to assign Data and Control ports A window will show up and the data port usually is detected rather quickly it might take a bit longer to find the control port e The ports for SIS Interface and Depth Values are COM ports of the customer s PC They have to be selected manually If there are problems to detect the ports please see section 7 4 on page 115 for more hints to setup the SES 2000 compact software properly Here is a short procedure to check if all COM ports have been set properly after starting the SESWIN system software serial port settings have to be made before in the SESWIN options e The SESWIN echoplot area on the screen should be scrolling Data port OK e Vary the range the scrolling is either faster or more slowly Control port OK e Connect the GPS device to the COM port that has been chosen as the SIS Interface Then position data should appear in the SIS window left bottom corner o
250. ould lL 40 be increased to 60 to get a true seabed The increase in sensitivity hed means that the system will not detect the lower signal return from the ue a soz Marine growth and will detect the true seabed Detection Sensitivity petection Offset hom TP Bottom Detection Sensitivity range 10 90 steps 1 is used to e set a threshold for the water depth calculation SO Bottom Averaging range 1 32 steps 1 gives a value for Bottom Averaging smoothing the water depth values a Detection Offset from the Top presets a minimum depth for the iinet ae WD algorithm to start calculation A triangle within the depth ruler M Draw LF WD Line right hand of the SESWIN screen indicates which level has been M Draw HF WD Line chosen It is the operator s responsibility to ensure that this level is always above the true bottom line Draw LF WD Line Draw HF WD Line When these items are activated the calculated water depth is plotted in the echogram 5 8 7 Threshold General Transmit Gain The threshold settings affect the colours of the echogram the Range Process recorded data will not be affected Based on the parameters defined Depth Threshold by the user the colour table for displaying the echogram is E computed automatically LF bode Loa LF HF Mode defines if linear or logarithmic spaced thresholds are l used to calculate the echo print Should usually be set to logarithmic LFMinLevel 4 scale
251. ould switch to green and the text behind should be Server is active Now you can start to prepare HYPACK Start the Hypack software package click on the Hardware button and click on Add Device and add the INNOMAR device driver INNOMAR SES reader SesInno dll as shown in the figure Add Device Idronaut Capture Device idronaut dil IHC Suction Tube Position Monitor ihc dll IMS Dredge IHS dll Inclinometer nclnometer dll Inland Dredging Instrumentation Inland dredaing all lnnerspace 110 120 Tide Gauge Innitide dll lnnerspace 446 Serial Inns ll lnnerspace 455 imn455 dll lnnerspace Bubbler lnnerspaceBubbler dll lnnerspace LED Helmerman imnled all lnnomar Depth Sounder nnomar dil lnnomar SES reader Sesl rr all lnspects2 Inspects dll InTouch Interface Intouch dll Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 149 Before using the device driver some settings have to be made The first step is to select the Network Port as the connection The protocol has to be TCP and the role is Client In the Host field you have to key in the IP address and Port number as defined earlier in the SESWIN Broadcast Server window HY PACK Hardware C Hypack Projects TEST survey32_ini File Edit Options Help Add Device Add Mobile Device Advanced H ypack Configuration Functions pupa Offset SP GPS With NME40193 Outp M Depth fet Innomar SES reader anual foco mi M
252. oy oo 22 Forward oog m Roll 10 00 deg Vertical o oo m Pitch o oo deg Vertical Postive Downward Latency 0 000 SEC Options Use for matris update Paper Annotation Record device speciic messages ii Mobile Assignmen Installed on Boat Connect Network Fort Network Parameter Protocal TCP Role Client Host fi 92 168 98 9 Port 4001 Driver Seslnno al Now you can test the ws Device Test Test Window connection Before you test the Innomar SES reader connection please make sure SESWIN is streaming data In order to perform a test just click on the Test button and you will get the following ae e iied a Api window Se oc A TE al a Innomar Technologie GmbH 150 SES 2000 User s Guide Hypack provides some additional features to optimize the display settings Press the Setup Icon on the button bar and the setup window will appear color Settings x Color Settings Channel 1 Channel 2 File Help Depth tiin Depth E Min Depth fo Color Options water RGB Color E 1000 00 1249 99 E ci Step fi Step fi E 1250 00 1499 99 Color Bands E E 1500 00 1749 99 Annotation EE 1750 00 1999 99 P Target a Sears Depth Options J Automatic Minimal Depth UU E 2500 00 2749 99 User Ranges E 2750 00 2999 99 E 3000 00 3249 99 Bitma
253. p BeamStesina with other acoustic systems Mode f nternal Trigger C Extemal Trigger See section 6 on page 99 for a detailed description of all parameters f Alternating Trigger Burst Mode Settings Percentage of active time frame 4 Cancel Mode There are three different modes for the SES 2000 synchronisation e internal SES 2000 stand alone or master device e external SES 2000 slave device triggered by other equipment e alternating SES 2000 master device pinging alternating with external device The possible settings are described in detail in section 6 on page 99 Don t forget to switch back to internal synchronisation if no external trigger source is used External Trigger Settings If the SES 2000 system is triggered externally you can apply a trigger delay and or generate bursts of transmission pulses with each trigger event See section 6 2 on page 100 for details Alternating Trigger Settings With Alternating Trigger the SES 2000 system is running as master and generates a trigger pulse at Trigger OUT when a external device shall ping rather than pinging itself With this mode there are some tuning parameters that are described in detail in section 6 3 on page 105 Burst Mode Settings There is a special Deep Sea Pulse Mode available to ensure the highest possible pulse rate even in deep waters see section 9 5 4 on page 191 This mode will produce either equidistant
254. p File Name Pinter Amy E 3250 00 3499 99 es lash abil E 3500 00 3749 99 JC sHypack Projects TEST untitled bmp OK Cancel E 3750 00 3999 99 Add Depth Band E 4000 00 4249 99 EE 4250 00 4499 99 E 4500 00 4749 99 resis ete It is possible to change the colours for annotation a ries jus l EE 5250 00 5499 99 targets and so on You should adjust the colours for ee Up o1 Down the amplitude levels by clicking on the Amplitude Edt Smooth _ inver Colors button OK Cancel To obtain a nice view of the SES data you should add a new depth band The amplitude range usually goes from 0 to 32 768 For example you could create a colour band from blue lowest signal amplitude to red strongest amplitude with steps of 250 You can also use different colour bands or grey scale levels Important Notes Although you store the data by Hypack we strongly recommend logging the data by the SESWIN software too Received data in Hypack are affected by the SESWIN settings If a draft value is applied in SESWIN then all received data are draft corrected already If you want to do draft correction in Hypack you should setup a draft of O in SESWIN General Options lf heave correction is enabled in SESWIN then still all received data in Hypack are not heave corrected It is up to the Hypack software to apply heave e g from a motion sensor or from a GPS RTK system You should
255. pe are Se sheet and is moulded non removable to the transducer NGE ee yy minimum recommended bend radius static 100mm dynamic Soom w Y 220mm Power connector switch and main fuse You have to connect a power cable with the SES 2000 system unit The power cable is delivered with the SES 2000 system The main switch is used to switch the SES 2000 unit on and off Prior to that the AC cable must be connected to the ship s power supply Please note that the switch will not disconnect from the power lines There is high voltage inside the unit if the power cable is plugged in The system is fused with 10A slow There are more fuses located behind a plate in the rear panel to protect the transmitters see section 3 13 on page 43 There are power LEDs in the front panel of the SES system indicating if all voltages that are needed by the system are available If these LEDs are not lit after switching power on please switch off the system and disconnect from mains immediately and contact INNOMAR USB connector remote control port SES 2000 compact only There are USB connectors to attache external harddisks for data beckup transfer An external PC or Notebook that will be connected to the main unit using the USB port operates the SES 2000 compact system Innomar Technologie GmbH 40 SES 2000 User s Guide Navigation input Navigation IN The SES 2000 system has an RS232 input for navigation data The es nav
256. pecified n Hange Process window will not be recorded The Start point and Length will vary depending on specific requirements of a survey Start 125m Length 25 a Start defines the start depth of the displayed echoprint and the recorded data This can be changed at any time steps 1 10 m Length sets the depth range of the shown and recorded data This cannot be changed while recording data Auto Range Start use LF aterdepth Adjust Ping Rate 100 SEEESLEESI If for any reason the water depth is not known then initially a shallow E i starting point Start with large range Length should be employed Fing Rate 0 00 pps to determine the water depth This will ensure that the true seabed and not a multiple will be recorded Once the seabed has been Foot Print 3dB 0 0 m determined the range should be reduced so that only the area of Foot Print 6dB 0 0 m interest is recorded Take care not to follow a multiple especially when using Deep Sea Pulse Mode see section 5 8 2 on page 59 The Auto Range Start function controls the automatic sample start depending on the water depth It should not generally be used Be awere if the system loses the seabed while using the auto range start function the continued seabed searching can result in data gaps This may happen at steep slopes or while crossing the screw water while manoeuvring If the seabed is known to be relatively flat the auto ra
257. pinging to reduce interferen ce with other acoustic equipment having lower ping rate e g MBES gt There may be artefacts produced by water column features e g fish schools or additional multiple echoes in the echoprints if Deep Sea Pulse Mode or Burst Mode is used To check if features visible are real you should switch off deep sea pulse mode temporarily Data Sampling Range Transmit Pulse ar H I E c Teh J Basic Transmit Cycle Range Based DSM Transmit Cycle lt M Range Length Based Principle of Deep Sea Pulse Mode and Burst Pulse Mode Transmit pulses for normal echo sounding ping rate depends on range end respective water depth a Deep Sea Pulse Mode ping rate depends mainly on range length b and burst mode c In this example burst mode duty cycle was set to 70 active time Omitted pings are placed at the beginning of basic transmit cycle Ping Rate vs Range range start 150m range start 250m dotted lines for normal mode Ping Rate Hz 20 30 40 50 70 80 90 100 60 Range m Dependency of ping rate on sampling range for two different range start values dotted lines for normal transmit mode and solid lines for Deep Sea Pulse Mode Innomar Technologie GmbH 9 6 Signal Processing There are different possibilities to increase
258. ppendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH 218 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide A 2 6 SES 2000 ROV Specifications SES 2000 ROV Dimension and Weight eS iy i tae _ a i i i La r re 219 Length Width Height Weight in air in water mm mm mm kg Pressure bottle 1000m 750 D 446 D 446 100 5 Pressure bottle 2000m 792 446 446 140 28 Transducer 1000m and 2000m 470 470 55 28 22 Transport box electronic container 980 530 750 40 Transport box transducer 700 600 380 10 SES 2000 ROV Technical Data Description Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver aperture 1 8 0 2 x 0 2 m Transmitter primary frequency about 100kHz secondary frequency 5 6 8 10 12 15 KHz adjustable Multi frequency Signals Transmitting channels 16 Electrical Pulse Power gt 18 kW Transmitting Sensitivity gt 239 dB uPa re 1m Heave Compensation yes depending on valid motion sensor data Roll Pitch Compensation and roll compensation by electronic beam steering in a range of 16 Beam Steering depending on valid motion sensor data Pulse Length 66 800us adjustable gt 5 cm depends on frequency and selected range Accuracy 100 kHz 0 02 m 0 02 of water depth 10 kHz 0 04 m 0 02 of water depth at pul
259. ppropriate to find the seafloor Optimize the gain settings for both channels Optimize the range settings Optimize frequency pulse length and gain settings Check and optimize the signal processing settings Check the settings for annotation profile number and marker counter Start data recording F5 Check printer if necessary F6 After some minutes switch off data recording F5 and transmitter F4 and printer F6 Switch to File Mode F2 Open the new recorded data file F3 and check if the data was recorded properly Switch back to System Mode F2 oo0o00000000000O O Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 21 3 SES 2000 Hardware System Installation 3 1 SES 2000 System Overview The SES 2000 systems consists of the following components e Main system unit containing the transmitters receivers amplifiers there is an extension unit for the SES 2000 medium and deep systems e External PC notebook for the SES 2000 compact system e Transducer used to transmit and receive the signals e Workstation optional to remote control the system via network LAN Within the cabinet of the main unit there are the power supply transmitter units units for analogue and digital signal processing and an industrial personal computer The SES 2000 compact is shipped without any integrated PC The operating system of the control PC is MS Windows XP Mouse and keyboard have to be connected to the dev
260. ps local time synchronized to the received time string For this the Windows time zone settings are used and the received time string is assumed to represent GMT Not to change the local time is useful if you have to synchronize to other data like tide data in post processing since these data are often available with local time stamp only Save Scheme All settings made in this dialog can be saved into a sis file It saves a lot of time if a survey takes place on the same ship with the same GPS equipment once more Save the data of the SIS settings for example as NameOfShip sis or NameOfGPS sis Load Scheme Saved schemes with the SIS settings sis files be reloaded see Save Scheme above Innomar Technologie GmbH 80 5 11 2 System Interfaces System Interfaces als Baud Rate C 4800 C 38400 f 9600 57600 C 79200 115200 Data Format Date Bits COB i f g Output Values Output Parity f Hon C oadd C even Stop Bits fe ney L SES 2000 User s Guide In this dialog the set tings for the depth output ASCII string of the SES 2000 system are made You can send the online calcu SES 96 lw Header W SIS String jf Time i SIS String Ww HF Depth Ww SIS Strings W LF Depth iw SIS String J LF Frequency Hz ASCII Data 4bit J HF Pulse Length z ASCII MAU Data J LF Pulses F515 String SIS String SIS Sting P SIS String lated water depth values HF and LF channel
261. ption e Allow High Pulse Rate At shallow waters and in small ranges the pulse repetition rate can be increased Pulse Length is limited in this mode This mode can be combined with Multi Frequency and Beam Steering modes only Innomar Technologie GmbH 60 SES 2000 User s Guide Deep Sea Pulse Mode This allows high ping rates even at deep water areas The mode is often used for deep water survey range start gt 50m since the increased ping rate will give much higher data quality and resolution see section 9 5 4 on page 191 Can be combined with High Energy Mode and Burst Mode Deep Sea Mode is possible wit internal trigger only It will not work correctly if the system is triggered externally Some more information is given in section 6 4 on page 107 Burst Mode This is a special Deep Sea Pulse Mode intended for reducing interference if SES 2000 sub bottom profilers are operated with other acoustic equipment simultaneously see section 7 13 on page 139 The duty cycle has to be set up in SESWIN main menu Options System Settings Synchronisation see section 5 10 2 on page 67 Can be combined with High Energy Mode Burst Mode is possible wit internal trigger only It will not work correctly if the system is triggered externally Some more information is given in section 6 4 on page 107 Chirp Mode allows the transmission of a fixed Chirp LFM signal over the complete range
262. r printing Only one channel can be printed in the online system mode Multi Frequency Options Amplifier correction can by applied depending on the selected frequency during the multi frequency mode This is necessary due to the fact that the efficiency of the generation of the low frequencies with the parametric effect differs slightly between frequencies Enabling this option will produce corrected amplitudes for each frequency used Innomar Technologie GmbH 74 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 10 9 System Settings Dual Range System Settings x Generally only data samp System Synchronisation Files i Beam Steering led in the selected range are Multi Frequency Side Scan recorded Range start and Extended Range Settings length are set in the Extend Primary Range Above m 5 Range parameter menu Extend Primary Range Below m 5 see section 5 8 4 on page Set Extended Range to Double Primam Range Length 62 It is possible to have an extended recording range that is a larger range is recorded than visible on screen by using the Dual Range feature Setting for this are made in this dialog while the Dual Range mode is switched on off in the Transmit parameter menu see section 5 8 2 on page 59 Extended Range Settings lt is possible to either set range extension manually or to let the system set range extension automatically based on the primary range extended range is than twice the
263. r the best driver in these locations FTOI Dual USE A Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows sP Tellme why this testing is important Include this location in the search Continuing your installation of this software may impair C SBackup Driver USBCom 100103 9052154_110 v he destabilisethiesc omeck anei aian oi youi Felen either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly Don t search will choose the driver to install recommends that you stop this installation now and Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that contact the hardware vendo r for software that has the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware passed Windows Logo testing Cars Next gt Continue Anyway STOP Installation lf WINDOWS complains about the driver didn t pass the Windows Logo Test press button Continue Anyway Maybe the Found New Hardware dialog shows up several times Then the procedure described above has to be followed again In the end WINDOWS tells you that the new hardware is installed and ready to use nn Innomar Technologie GmbH esses si i i sSSSS 7 4 2 Checking the assigned COM ports Now you should check for the new COM ports either using the Device
264. racy of 0 25 degrees DMS roll and pitch accuracy of 0 1 or 0 05 degrees The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings Please refer to lt lt Section 3 Operation Issue gt gt in the manual of your specific sensor for details how to configure the sensor for the User Configurable Format The following data fields must be set e status e roll e pitch e heave e heading Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide Packet format S SOP Character 3Ah a status r roll p pitch h heave d heading L space character C carriage return line feed S T p h d l OA 678 aI A 01234567890123456 SabLrrrrrbLpppppLhhhhhLdddddl String example ASCII U S655 aal O27 Cae oul That means all values are decimal 3Ah Start of Package SOP U status U settled condition u settling condition lt space gt 8515 roll 85 15 90 90 leading negative leading lt space gt positive lt space gt lt Space gt 3512 pitch 35 13 90 90 lt space gt lt space gt 0275 heave 2 5m 99 to 99m lt space gt lt space gt 245 7 heading 245 78 0 to 359 99 delivered by internal compass module lt LF gt line feed Format TSS 1 This ASCll format is supported by several motion sensors The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings
265. ransmitting a fixed chirp LFM signal over the complete range of centre frequencies This is useful in deep water areas to increase the signal to noise ratio by using longer pulses without reducing resolution Multi Purpose Input Optionally there is a Multi Purpose Input serial interface available that can be used to remote control the SES device or to receive data from additional sensors e g transducer depth sound velocity heading water depth from external sensors The following interfaces can be established see also section 5 11 3 on page 81 e Itis possible to change the most important parameters of the SES 2000 system via the serial interface That can be used to switch on off data acquisition for several instruments from a central computer Innomar Technologie GmbH 224 SES 2000 User s Guide e Itis possible to store pressure values or converted depth values from a DIGIQUARTZ compatible pressure sensor with the SES data For the SES 2000 ROV system these depth values can be used for flying depth correction during post processing e Itis possible to receive and store sound velocity values from SVP14 15 20 compatible sound velocity probes e The multi purpose port can be used to receive heading values and store them with the SES data The heading values can be used for position processing transducer offset correction and or side scan processing e Depth values from other devices can be stored with the SES data and
266. reen there are two possibilities to check if there are valid data from the motion sensor received by the SES 2000 system the MS LED in the status bar and the MS window in the lower left corner of the screen sis MMS dataok ais ree Green received data OK Pitch 0 1 Yellow received data is flagged instable by the sensor Yaw l Heading 143 9 Rea no data received or no motion sensor connected lf there is no incoming data from the motion sensor and the MS window heave roll pitch yaw and heading permanently show 0 0 then you should e Check the motion sensor s power supply Unstable power supplies may cause the sensor to reboot again and again In this case the sensor will send data marked instable invalid or no data is sent at all e Check the motion sensor s serial connection e Check the settings in the Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor tab sheet It takes some time for the motion sensor to stabilize So allow some minutes for that process A stable state has been achieved if the MS LED in the status bar is green and motion sensor data is displayed in the MS window If there is no stable data from the motion sensor and in the MS window invalid data is shown for heave roll pitch yaw and heading or the MS LED in the status bar is flickering then you should e Check the settings in the Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor tab sheet e Check if the moti
267. remove noise This is a very strong filter and weak layer signals may also be removed so this filter should be used with care Median Filter f checked a digital filter is used to remove peak noise from the echo data This should be the preferred filter for a noise reduction especially when the noise is not uniform but consists of spikes This filter will also help to remove noise caused by other acoustical systems resulting in stripes or regular patterns due to their pinging regime Swell Filter Can be used for Vessel based work if no motion sensor for heave correction is available It is generally preferable not to use this filter at all because any genuine features such as mega ripples or sand waves will be smoothed If you know that the seabed is flat and that any apparent ripple marks displayed are due to heave then this filter can be used The filter performance can be adjusted by the parameter in the drop down box Additional information about the signal processing algorithms is given in section 9 6 on page 192 Innomar Technologie GmbH 64 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 8 6 Depth General Transmit Gain This affects the on line depth calculation Usually the default settings Range Process can be used LF HF Detection Sensitivity 40 40 Gepth Threshold LF HF Bottom Averaging 5 7 This menu would be used if for example the system was detecting ER a false seabed due to extensive marine growth The sensitivity c
268. rmance problems at low baud rates Data bits 8 Select higher settings for faster performance Defaults Parity None z Receive Bytes 2048 Stop bits 1 7 Transmit Bytes 2048 Flow control None T BM Options EMAAR Select lower settings to correct response problems Latency Timer msec 2 Miscellaneous Options Serial Enumerator Minimum Read Timeout msec fo Serial Printer Cancel If Power Off Minimum Write Timeout msec lo Event On Surprise Removal Set ATS On Close B E E W asl Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 117 Using the SES configuration tool SES Configuration x After starting the SES configu ration tool see next section you can check available COM ports in the Ports tab All High Speed Port ports are listed and special as properties like high speed port are shown This method is faster and more convenient than looking up ports in the device manager Fort List Refresh List crcl 7 4 3 Setup the communication ports within the SES configuration tool Now you should start the SES configuration tool You ll find either a shortcut at your WINDOWS desktop or start sesconfig exe in the SESWIN folder usually C SESApplications SESWIN For the SES 2000 compact system you have to select External PC within the System tab sheet as shown below SES Configuration Now you have to assign different COM ports to t
269. roper synchro nization it is sufficient to connect SES 2000 Trigger OUT to pins 6 GND and 8 Trigger At short distances the TTL output of the SES 2000 SBP can drive the RS232 input of the EM 710 If longer distances are required a voltage converter is available from INNOMAR If the EM710 trigger OUT pins 1 and 2 are connected to trigger IN of the SES 2000 SBP also the trigger from MBES to SBP can be used as described in the previous sub section O CON W PO SES 2000 SBP settings There is a special Deep Sea Pulse Mode available to ensure the highest possible pulse rate even in deep waters This mode will produce either equidistant pulses or bursts of sound pulses Bursts are useful to reduce interference with other acoustic equipment like multibeam MBES If the burst mode shall be used the duty cycle has to be set active time of total time Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 145 frame in percent and the burst mode has to be activated separately within the Transmit parameter menu see below Both Deep Sea Mode and Burst Mode are possible with internal trigger only They will not work correctly if the system is triggered externally The following picture explains the different SES 2000 SBP transmission modes Transmit Pulse Data Sampling Range I F E b c STS Basic Transmit Cycle Range Base
270. s An operation was attempted on a nonblocking socket with an operation already in progress that is calling connect a second time on a nonblocking socket that is already connecting or canceling an asynchronous request that has already been canceled or completed 10038 Socket operation on nonsocket An operation was attempted on something that is not a socket 10039 Destination address required A required address was omitted from an operation on a socket Innomar Technologie GmbH 244 SES 2000 User s Guide 10040 Message too long A message sent on a datagram socket was larger than the internal message buffer or some other network limit or the buffer used to receive a datagram was smaller than the datagram itself 10041 Protocol wrong type for socket A protocol was specified in the socket function call that does not support the semantics of the socket type requested 10042 Bad protocol option An unknown invalid or unsupported option or level was specified in a getsockopt or setsockopt call 10043 Protocol not supported The requested protocol has not been configured into the system or no implementation for it exists 10044 Socket type not supported The support for the specified socket type does not exist in this address family 10045 Operation not supported The attempted operation is not supported for the type of object referenced Usually this occurs when a socket descriptor to a socket that cannot suppor
271. s the SIS Monitor for System Interfaces the Navigation Input and the MCP Monitor for the Multi Purpose Input Both monitor windows can be activated via Main Menu Options Since both monitors are Network SE5 Client basically the same they only refer to different serial SIS GPS Heading via Network Port ports only the SIS monitor is described below Broadcast Server S15 Monitor NS MEP Monitor The item SIS Monitor starts a monitoring window for all incoming SIS data strings indepen dent of the fact if they are used or not The monitor is very useful to check which data come from the serial port and how to make the SIS settings if the type and structure of the navi gation data are unknown Login at Startup The settings for the SIS input port must be made at Options System Interfaces SIS Only if these settings are correct and a device is attached to the system something will happen within the SIS monitor SIS Monitor 18h43 66 49 4 5 1Ba849 66 49 4 8 7 di s 6U 3 4 5 LB8SBS1 66 49 4 5 1Bejes2 66 49 4 8 STOP ON TOP Stream Data to File On top of the monitor window a ruler with numbers for each byte position is shown This numbering can be used for the settings in the dialog Options System Interfaces SIS The main part of the monitor shows the incoming data The strings are scrolling from the bottom to the top of the SIS moni
272. s checked markers are drawn on the screen and printed on the echo plots based on the track made good The distance between two track marks has to be defined in the same units used for the coordinates ate the X and Y SIS strings If a rectangular coordinate system is used UTM for instance the track markers correspond to metres Marker lines are labelled with position data A second label can be chosen separately in Position Data Source e g time string An example for track markers plotted on the echoplot screen is given on the next page 7 10 3 How to set Time Markers If the draw time marker option is checked markers Marker are drawn on the screen and printed on the echo Be herr hee ker ncnentist no plots based on the time in seconds left Draw Time Mark de 0 The time between two marks has to be defined ina a ae ee range of 1 to 600s Draw Fix Marker For this function the time from the PC clock is used Draw KF Marker 100 00 Marker lines are labelled with time string M Use Trigger Input for Event Marker An example for time markers plotted on the echoplot screen is given on the next page Innomar Technologie GmbH 128 SES 2000 User s Guide The following picture shows track markers labelled with X and Y coordinates SES for Windows Program Options Help Depth i Threshold T Lane Mianen Jeau Se Stark 240m Lenath E m T Auto Range Start Adjust Ping Rate 100 ee
273. se open The upper part of the Status Bar displays a variety of parameters being used for the survey Range LF Channel Frequency and Pulse Length Profile number and Data file size The lower part of the Status Bar displays local computer time and date as well as some status information about attached devices The meaning of the colours is Gfe en OK Yellow Warning and A amp i Not Working e PRN Printer Information Red colour as above will mean no printer connected out of paper etc e HD NET Hard Disc space This shows the space remaining on the hard disc the data is being recorded on to The colour will change to yellow with 250MB remaining and then go to red when close to empty HD refers to the local hard disc while NET refers to the hard disc of a remote controlled system e MS Motion Sensor The colour will be yellow if there is a problem such as the MS string is not recognised or maybe vessel movements are too abrupt to be compen sated for Instable Flag and red if the motion sensor is unplugged or not working e SIS Ship Information System navigation data The will be yellow if there is data coming but is not recognised e g due to wrong baud rate The colour will be red if there is no incoming data e Case If the system has a water protected case the rear cover must be removed before using the system Red colour indicates that a closed cover is detected and the transmitter cannot be switched on e MCP M
274. se length 0 1ms Motion Sensor Input Serial RS232 input for motion sensor data used for heave and roll compensation 1 channel primary frequency HF 1 channel secondary frequency LF both channels envelope and full waveform of selected range Amplifier HF 0 90dB in 1dB steps manually or AGC EF 0 90dB in 1dB steps manually or AGC Pulse Repetition Rate lt 50 s Deep Sea Pulse Mode Recorded Channels Innomar Technologie GmbH 220 SES 2000 User s Guide Description O Z OSOS y Digitisation 16 bit sample frequency for full waveform data marsaron toremetape dara depending on selected range o Signal Processing noise reduction stacking 1 16 smoothing 1 eT data compression at high pulse repetition rates 1 16 DSP for improvement of signal to noise ratio resolution and penetration into sediment Noise Filter Median Filter Swell Filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoes replay of previously recorded files Data Output on line recording of envelope and full waveform data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters and navigation data on hard disk backup USB harddisk network LAN echogram on line B W or colour print external monitor Serial output RS232 for depth values with navigation data adjustable ASCII format Data Input Serial input RS232 for navigation data NMEA compatible or adjustable ASCII format Serial input RS232 for motion sensor da
275. se use the Ampli tude not High Resolution mode for this test After switching Signal Source to this connector SESWIN Options System Settings System the signal should affect the echogram part of the SESWIN screen depending on gain and frequency settings Now you can roughly check amplifier and filters by changing the input signal and or the SESWIN settings e Check transmitters The transducers must not be operated in air For test and maintenance purposes there are dummy transducers available from INNOMAR on request see figure Using these dummies it s possible to measure all signals going to the transducer You can check signal shapes for each transmitter stave and check the beam steering feature 8 1 4 Check Data Transfer from Controller Firmware Processor There are two COM ports used by the system to exchange commands and status information called High Speed Port and Control Port These ports have to be assigned properly and available for the SES 2000 system to work First check the COM port assignment in the SES configuration tool and check also if the COM ports are available in the WINDOWS OS device manager The SES configuration tool sesconfig exe can be used to list all available COM ports as well To check if status information is sent by the internal COMI Properties ao ix controller to the PC you can check data on the assigned Pott Settings High Speed Port COM1 for stand
276. see figures below Assuming a certain sound speed the travel time obtained can be converted into a distance water depth layer thickness etc lt 4 Echo from seafloor Travel time lt Echos from layers a Distance along profile Ar em naar eS ra rrr r ian ma a miie enn T aey S m er Y aaa piii raiar a r SNS pero ae Set ee a ene Samrat a m Area na m z 2 i seri a ae Reem was eae iea Rn ne E ORE el ee a ast es lt aan Se SATI gt bila Pe Es 3 ie ws er Tt Sa eee Ser ae eae X ATA Travel time F So ean The echo strength depends on the reflection coefficient the attenuation of the signal especially in the seafloor sediments and the roughness of the layer boundary The achieved resolution depends on the size of the footprint the effective length of the transmitted sound pulse as well as the pulse repetition rate The penetration depth into the seafloor is mainly controlled by sediment parameters like attenuation and roughness by SBP properties like source level and directivity and by environmental conditions like the noise level These dependencies and how parametric sub bottom profilers can overcome some drawbacks of conventional linear SBPs is discussed in detail in the following sections Innomar Technologie GmbH 180 SES 2000 User s Guide 9 2 Important Properties of Sub bottom Profilers 9 2 1 Footprint Directivity The so called footprint
277. sere y re ee ES oo N r E a m Fd a ue m i a a a i KS hee S Ta 5 lt Ka s B a T SE oS a rt a Ec ge ee ee i eae es R F a a s s aa A p am os S r m EE Eo Pe s 5 h 5 bes 2 Kena 7 d g E m oes E Pa ae IE 8 Sis es P k _ _ z Tim 3 ee ee ae T l l a m j ae re sc MA z n K r g A i B s 3 M E m ko e a a j E 1 aH a arr M a 1 a a a aot a ie Ea ga a 4 i me E i 1 4 Le a g gi i vag ha CS es as eT 4 X n s 3 s 5 i m r P rs a N ae i a ms r Ae Be a E e S e mee ae Pe a a z ae a r ae ee 1 F 1 j G p Mm 2 er k Es k ome is Pa j pes a p KE 1 e i an Tia z gt d 1 a ii z 7 my 3 d Tm a E Eg _ M l aes A s a gt e s A p oF a Se eh O 7s p ten aoa x ge cs F 1 T 3 Ae 4 r ee ae a Gana x P E SA 5 r n a F Tau a e a T z Ee ae 1 a 1T m g oy PAR 2 i Dias i lt Ia me r La b ij ae Z j d C s s a oar z Ge m G a ii 1 M F ss s i A 1 r a x g E 2 a n s a z B F ia me a a 0 on 0 a on x e n 0 on 0 on e s 7 Ry Lah i
278. set to fit in one external trigger cycle i 2 T The 2 pings fit into the external trigger ji anal Trigger IN 1 cycle aan esa a ae 7 i ee eee Renee eee erect ee ao li l 1 Fl i sianal Triaaer OUT Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide Now the time between two external trigger events is too short to transmit m two pings in between Therefore every second external trigger event is dis carded How to calculate the maximum t number of pings is described in the next subsection 6 2 4 External Trigger with Delay and Ping Rate Increase Mode External Trigger Settings f intemal Trigger Delay between sync pulse and ping pe 1000 15 80 m Delay as percentage of range 25 Number of pings for one syne pulse 2 Of course its possible to combine both features of the SES advanced trigger as shown in the figure In this case the delay is applied before the burst starts To avoid discarded trigger events the delay and the number lt of pings specified have to fit between a mio trigger nt b F sianal Trager OUT two trigger events see above signal Trigger IN If external trigger events are discarded due to high delay values or too many pings required per burst the trigger information EXT in the SESWIN status bar starts to flash yellow Range 2m 7m LF Freg 10kHz LF Pulses 1 Prof
279. shi neeln alee ieee eae 47 4 2 Initial Setup using the SES Configuration TOO ccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesnees 47 5 SES for Windows SESWIN System Software cccsecccseeeeseeees 51 Ol The SESW IN SCreC ie neinn tha seta ettaig eet da aed ee tdeetaendiecndit aoe eae 51 D2 DE OVW IN Main MENU eserse a snckuinasamos bien e E ERESSE 52 5 37 SESWIN B tton Bary THOPIKCYS catene a e E ES 53 S4 DEOVWIN VEVElIDISDIAY eromen a E E erie teeta 56 55 OESWIN Dept DISHlaY ecen a ES 56 56 M ntonng VVINGOWS asari a E eaa a 56 57 Olaus Ba onien aa a A 57 5 8 Parameter Menu Control Parameters c cccccccssecceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseessaeeeesaeees 58 59 SQQUICK OME ONS acheter ate ete setae eae eae tare ent eae 65 D310 SESVWIN System SEWING sse synactaeuhee aidasddomunabemavaveupaodsenasedns 66 5 11 SESVWIN SYSIEM INVGHACES asisi cio deter nceteenl a E ub enienaiesadaiehe 77 512 Network Settings serrr E 87 5 13 SIS Monitor MCP Monitor cece ec ceececeececceceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeseeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeees 92 Innomar Technologie GmbH 6 SES 2000 User s Guide A FETO c eeen ne ere enn E enero nny era om rae tre enone een ye ert ere 93 B15 Other TOOIS MNO SChOINS sarsa E 95 516 TNE PIMEC ECNOP IO cruin a a a 96 5 17 Data File FOmale wniesione a 97 6 SES 2000 Synchronisation Trigger modes cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 6 1 Mema SyYnNcAron Salossa Gea ede eee cde pele tods 100 6 2 Extem
280. sion and system remote control To control the system a mouse PS 2 and a keyboard PS 2 have to be connected to the system unit Both will be delivered with the system In addition to the built in TFT Display not SES 2000 compact you can connect an external monitor to the video output of the system unit An external power supply is necessary Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 41 TFT Display The SES 2000 main unit not SES 2000 compact will be delivered with an integrated 10 4 TF T display The resolution is 800 x 600 pixel In addition to the TFT Display you can also use an external monitor with the system unit by connecting it to the Monitor Output of the system unit cine nid Control Buttons vel SES 2000 compact There are four buttons to control the properties of the built in TFT display brightness contrast etc al ikiak dando i SES 2000 a AAA JAX gt bel jae ERE E E O a a iy bible ERa lt IIIA n a Barn A ET EN O UN ae eee The main uneton to mr the ameen param a survey are implemented as hotkeys at the front of the system unit not SES 2000 compact Accessible functions are SND switch transmitting on off REC switch recording on off PRN switch printing on off CHN switch channel HF LF FRQ change the LF Frequency PLS change the LF Pulse length MRK set marker which will be stored and printed in the echo print CNT set profile counter Printer If
281. sition fix Data status V navigation receiver warning Latitude of fix Nors Longitude of fix E or W Speed over ground in knots Track made good in degrees True UT date Magnetic variation degrees Easterly var subtracts from true course E or W Checksum GSA GPS receiver operating mode SVs used and DOP 2 3 14 15 16 17 GPGSA A 3 19 28 14 18 27 22 31 39 1 7 1 0 1 3 35 Mode M Manual forced to operate in 2D or 3D A Automatic 3D 2D Mode 1 Fix not available 2 2D 3 3D IDs of SVs used in position fix null for unused fields PDOP HDOP VDOP GSV Number of SVs in view PRN numbers elevation azimuth amp SNR values O O A UN 8 11 12 15 16 19 GPGSV 4 1 13 02 02 213 03 3 000 11 00 121 14 13 172 05 67 Total number of messages of this type in this cycle Message number Total number of SVs in view SV PRN number Elevation in degrees 90 maximum Azimuth degrees from true north 000 to 359 SNR 00 99 dB null when not tracking Information about second SV same as field 4 7 Information about third SV same as field 4 7 Information about fourth SV same as field 4 7 Innomar Technologie GmbH 236 SES 2000 User s Guide Blank Page Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 237 A 8 Motion Sensor Data Formats Several manufacturers of motion sensors are supported the Seatex MRU motion sensors the motion sensors from TSS CMS and DMS with an accuracy of better tha
282. ssel e All connectors have to be protected by pressure caps or dust caps when the pressure vessel is shipped mounted or not in use e Before diving make sure all plugs are connected tightly and all unused connectors are protected by dummy plugs pressure caps turned out not to be sufficient e The cable s connectors have to be protected by dust caps if not used e Never plug and unplug connectors when power is switched on e A separate ground wire must be connected between the GND contact on the transducer and the GND contact on the pressure vessel e An additional ground connection should be established between the pressure vessel and the ROV itself e The sealing test of the pressure vessel should be done with low pressure but not less than 0 7 bars e During transportation the shipped transport box has to be used 3 7 3 SES 2000 ROV Transducer e For the SES 2000 ROV system a pressure proof transducer is used e weight about 25 kg e dimensions about 50cm x 5cm e There is a plug socket connection for the cable During transport and installation the transducer s active area should be protected against mechanical damages The transducer has to be mounted horizontally and there must be no turbulences below the transducer caused by gaps noses or propellers in front of the transducer s mounting place The transducer must not be placed onto vibrating constructions and should be acoustically decoupled from the RO
283. st OS Version Windows 2000 The help menu is accessible in file mode only This and some other useful documentation tools are featured in section 7 18 on page 162 5 15 3 Help About About SES for Windows SES tor Windows Version 1 7 Build 1 7 1 35 SH 2006 17 9 7006 by Innomar Technologie GmbH The About box informs you about the copyright and registration information and the Software Version Coordinate Transtormatian ProLat DLL a 5 a i The help menu is accessible in file mode only 2006 by Effective Objects Innomar Technologie GmbH 96 SES 2000 User s Guide 5 16 The Printed Echo Plot The echo data can be printed during System Mode as well as during File Mode Due to the high speed requirements not every colour printer on the market can be used A list of supported printers is given in appendix A 5 on page 229 The printout will be normally on A4 sheets US Letter is possible too The adjustable printer settings can be found in the main menu Options System Interfaces Printer see section 5 11 6 on page 84 The following picture shows a typical plot Schvenkvinkel 0 Rong a Ot x i f att oe oh Bao a W fe 1 om vy wat N AG y io a Pr way ane Me oy A y pi E Fy wht P a av oy fi va MING a my va AY fu iy aaa We CIA ove fet eS a wth sas 26 d rie Pr Aaa bul slinge Verst rkuzg guear 12 kir Sedi
284. string of the SES 96 format by activating the check boxes The header is SES Additionally the output string can contain or not the time HF depth value LF depth value the HF pulse length the LF frequency and number of LF pulses the SIS strings as defined in the SIS menu and the motion sensor MRU data One check box enables the output of an ASCII string containing the amplitude data of the active channel as 4 bit values plus the range information Innomar Technologie GmbH CaN cL 5 11 3 System Interfaces Multi Input Option System Interfaces x Optionally there is a Multi Purpose Input serial interface Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits available that can be used to pies R leet re ete remote control the SES m 19200 115200 g even s device via a simple serial Multi Purpose Input Input Values interface or to receive data Denth Input Data Sting Format DESO 25 El from additional sensors e g transducer depth sound velocity heading water depth Use External Depth for 4uto Range Function val u es Record Input Data l Record Enabled SIS Sting Number to write data to i This option is also described in section A 3 on page 223 Sample String Tet Sting DBO000Z 60 m 2nd String DAOOO02 45 m Cancel COM Port serial interface Settings These parameters have to be set according to the equipment you want to use Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity Multi Purpose Input You have to c
285. surge duration lt 20A lt 0 1sec power line fused 2 16A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C lt 70 non condensing rel humidity EMC The SES 2000 light system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance against electrical interference EN 55011 emission standards Option 100kHz Side scan Extension For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 209 A 2 2 SES 2000 light Specifications SES 2000 light Dimension and Weight Main Unit Dimensions LxWxH 52 cm x 40 cm x 36 cm Housing 19 inch 8U Weight about 38 kg Optional a housing for rough environments is available Transducer Dimensions LxWxH 23 cm x 26cm x 7 cm Weight incl 20m cable about 25 kg The transducer cable is moulded non removable to the transducer The cable length is fixed to 20m SES 2000 ight Technical Data Parameter Description Transducer non linear transmitter linear receiver dimensions of active area about 0 2m x 0 2m half power beam width for transmission 1 8 Transmitter primary frequency about 100kHz secondary frequency 4 5 6 8 10 12 15kHz user adjustable pulse width 66 500us user adj
286. system designed for hull mounting The cable cannot be detached from the array and has to be handled carefully The receiver array s bottom side is pressure sensitive no forces must stress the black area within the flange For general hints about transducer handling and installation please see next subsection The cable is moulded non removable to the transducer A forward pointing arrow on top of the array indicates the mounting direction The receiver array has to be placed behind the transmit transducer the gap between both arrays should be as small as possible There are 2 additional holes in the mounting frames to allow water to get behind the trans ducers These holes must not be sealed it s necessary to flood the space behind the arrays during operation The sealing to the ship s hull has to be made at the cables or by using a hosepipe to get the cables above water level To prevent corrosion a zinc anode should be placed behind the transducers The figure below shows the transmit and receiver array for the SES 2000 standard AR system prepared for hull mounting This example also shows the possibility to place protec tion covers in front of the transducers transmit zinc receiver arrays covered for array anodes array ice protection Innomar Technologie GmbH 34 SES 2000 User s Guide 3 10 Transducer Handling and Installation 3 10 1 General The SES 2000 systems are fitted with a transducer for both HF and LF operati
287. t also cause overheating It should be replaced as soon as possible 8 5 2 Changing the Range is impossible You want to change the range settings but the list box is inactive e The Record button has been activated The range length cannot be changed while recording e You are working in File Mode In file mode the range cannot be changed 8 5 3 Online Recording is not possible When you press the Record button F5 recording is not switched on It was working before e Your hard disk might be full Look at the status bar You see the characters HD followed by a number The number represents the free capacity on your storage device in MB The colour of the virtual LED indicates whether a certain level of free storage has been reached and should be green lange 2m Fm LF Freg 10kHz LF Pulses 2 maile Link open 22 02 2002 08 45 04 INT PAN no paper Buf 0 Page 0 HD 5659MB MS no data SIS no data oO Case open e The directory setting for the record path Options System Settings Files may be wrong or the specified path does not exist see section 5 10 3 on page 68 Innomar Technologie GmbH 174 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 5 4 The Output Depth Out does not work It seems that there is no data available at Depth OUT The external device connected to that output does not show any reaction e Depth OUT is a serial interface its settings have to be made according to the
288. t graphic different graphic formats track info position data ASCII digitized layer data ASCII xyz CODA PIPE digitized object data ASCII SES data ASCII SEG Y XTF Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 229 A 5 Supported Motion Sensors and Printers Supported Motion Sensors Motion sensor data can be used by the SES 2000 systems for heave compensation all systems and or roll Pitch compensation not for SES 2000 compact and light systems Several manufacturers of motion sensors are supported the Seatex MRU motion sensors the motion sensors from TSS CMS and DMS with an accuracy of better than 0 5 and the Octans from iXSEA Additionally some generic formats like the TSS 1 format and the EM 3000 format are supported e Seatex MRU User MRU user binary normal format e Seatex MRU std MRU standard binary normal format e TSS Sensor This format is called User Configurable Format by TSS ASCII e TSS 1 The TSS 1 format is compatible to several other models of motion sensors ASCII e Octans Std 1 is used by Octans motion sensors ASCII e EM 3000 Simrad format binary The supported data formats are described in detail in appendix A 6 on page 237 Supported Printers for Online Printing It is possible to get an online hardcopy of the echoprint using a wide range of printers Following printers are supported e Printers using Hewlett Packards PCL3 printer language e Printers using Hewlett Packards P
289. t this operation is trying to accept a connection on a datagram socket 10046 Protocol family not supported The protocol family has not been configured into the system or no implementation for it exists 10047 Address family not supported by protocol family An address incompatible with the requested protocol was used All sockets are created with an associated address family and a generic protocol type This error is returned if an incorrect protocol is explicitly requested in the socket call or if an address of the wrong family is used for a socket 10048 Address already in use Typically only one usage of each socket address protocol IP address port is permitted This error occurs if an application attempts to bind a socket to an IP address port that has already been used for an existing socket or a socket that was not closed properly or one that is still in the process of closing 10049 Cannot assign requested address The requested address is not valid in its context This normally results from an attempt to bind to an address that is not valid for the local machine 10050 Network is down A socket operation encountered a dead network This could indicate a serious failure of the network system that is the protocol stack that the Windows Sockets DLL runs over the network interface or the local network itself Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 245 10051 Network is unreachable A socket operation w
290. t_fos McBryde Thomas Flat Pole Sine No 2 mbtfpp McBride Thomas Flat Polar Parabolic mbtfpq McBryde Thomas Flat Polar Quartic mbtfps McBryde Thomas Flat Polar Sinusoidal merc Mercator mil_os Miller Oblated Stereographic mill Miller Cylindrical mpoly Modified Polyconic moll Mollweide murd1 murd3 Murdoch Ill nell Nell nell_h Nell Hammer nicol Nicolosi Globular nsper Near sided perspective nzmg New Zealand Map Grid ob_tran General Oblique Transformation ocea Oblique Cylindrical Equal Area oea Oblated Equal Area omerc Oblique Mercator ortel Ortelius Oval ortho Orthographic pconic Perspective Conic poly Polyconic American puto putp6 Putnins P1 PG qua_aut Quartic Authalic robin Robinson rpoly Rectangular Polyconic sinu Sinusoidal Sanson Flamsteed somerc Swiss Obl Mercator stere Stereographic tcc Transverse Central Cylindrical tcea Transverse Cylindrical Equal Area tissot Tissot tmerc Transverse Mercator tpead Two Point Equidistant tpers Tilted perspective ups Universal Polar Stereographic urm5 Urmaev V urmfps Urmaev Flat Polar Sinusoidal utm Universal Transverse Mercator UTM vandg van der Grinten l vandg2 vandg4 van der Grinten II IV vitk1 Vitkovsky wag1 Wagner Kavraisky VI wag2 7 Wagner Il VII weren Werenskiold wink1 Winkel wink2 Winkel II wintri
291. ta Please check synchronisation mode or No incoming data Control Unit The echo data does not scroll from the right to the left side Solutions e Look at SESWIN main menu Options System Settings Synchronisation and select the synchronisation mode Internal e If you have to use external synchronisation make sure there is a synchronisation signal fed to the Trigger IN input The synchronisation modes and the necessary TTL trigger signal are described in chapter 6 on page 99 e You could also check if there are data sent by the internal real time controller according to section 8 1 4 on page 168 8 3 3 Error message Transducer not plugged A message is displayed saying Transducer not plugged when you switch on transmitters Solutions e Check if the transducer is connected properly Unplug and plug again e This message might be also shown if there is some data communication problem between SESWIN and the internal real time controller In this case the echoprint screen is not scrolling from left to right 8 3 4 Error message variable overflow See SESWIN reacts unpredictably below 8 3 5 Error message divide by zero error See SESWIN reacts unpredictably below 8 3 6 SESWIN reacts unpredictably Pressing a button does not give the expected result Solution e Exit the program shut down the Windows OS switch off the computer i e power off a restart is not s
292. ta used for heave and roll pitch compensation Multi Purpose Input RS232 serial input External PC Workstation MS WINDOWS operating system Power Supply Requirements 115 230 V AC 5 10 50 60 Hz power consumption lt 500 W power on current surge duration lt 25A lt 0 1sec power line fused 2 16A slow Environmental Conditions storage 10 60 C lt 90 non condensing rel humidity in transport boxes operation 0 35 C for control unit lt 70 non condensing rel humidity The SES 2000 ROV system complies with IEC 1000 4 resistance against electrical interference EN 55011 emission standards For options please see appendix A 3 on page 223 For supported motion sensors and printers see appendix A 5 on page 229 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice due to continual product improvement Innomar Technologie GmbH Cables and Connectors Transducer cable Description Qty Manufacturer Part number Length Transducer cable 1 Burton 2003 04 A HW TC5M 5 0 m Transducer cable 1 Burton 2003 04 A HW TC6M 6 0 m 16 FT 5 IN 6 __ ___ 5 Meters 7 4 65 pees 00 97 81 7 81 81 a a camel Asaa DER E eee 4 45 i oe A SPECIAL SS SOs oe iaiia AN CONTACT PIN 1 UTR CONNECTOR PLUG SOCKET UAE ___l____ oe oe MOLDED ELASTOMER CONNECTOR PLUG PIN Meet 6611 3239 S 2 25 5 CONTACT SOCKET 1 16 39 PL Pins 1 2 3 4
293. tacking by factor 3 b and smoothing by factor 3 c 9 6 2 Algorithms lf the application requires a high resolution of sediment layers or embedded objects a special signal algorithm can be used In this case the slope of the envelope is shown instead of the envelope itself This is similar to edge detection algorithms used in image processing Signal processing algorithms can be switched by pressing the Amplitude High Resolution button or F7 The principle and processed data are shown in the figure below SES for Windows Program Options Help OWF Depth 1 00m demodulated echo signal threshold levels differentiated echo signal Principle of Amplitude and High Resolution echoprint processing left and settings applied to data right Innomar Technologie GmbH 194 clouds of gas bubbles 9 6 3 Threshold Settings Thresholds control mapping of received data to colours for echoprint online view and or online printing There are three parameters available to optimize the thresholds used for echo print generation depending on signal dynamics and signal to noise ratio e Threshold type linear logarithmic e Minimum threshold level e Threshold dynamic range For echo signals with low signal dynamics linear thresholds are SES 2000 User s Guide In general the high resolution mode should be used it will provide the most detailed picture of sediment structures Amplitude mode
294. tained e near field length transducer dimension D f const e near field length frequency f D const Innomar Technologie GmbH 184 SES 2000 User s Guide The figure below shows beam pattern examples of line shaped transducers length in Cartesian and polar coordinates Important parameters describing the directivity are e half power beam width 7 e aperture angle Oo e ratio of the amplitudes of the sidelobes mainlobe In general the directivity of a transducer depends on the size of the transducer related to the wavelength of the transmitted or received sound wave T 0 f l 2 gt Or A If 1 The following picture shows the sound pressure distribution at a horizontal seafloor sounded by a rectangular transducer for two different frequencies The size of the sounded area D called footprint depends on the transducer s half power beam width 7 and the distance h between transducer and seafloor Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 185 9 3 2 Electronic Beam Steering lf the transducer used for sound transmission or reception consists of a number of indepen dently controlled elements the direction of the beam patterns mainlobe can be changed This is illustrated in the following figure using n elements with the length a and placed with the distance d along the line shaped transducer sin n sin sin sin v nsin sin v sind TATATATA T
295. ters power supply There are spare fuses in all fuse holders lf you assume a defect of the transmitters check the fuses If you detect any fault fuse please contact INNOMAR or an authorised company for further instructions Unauthorized persons must not open the electronic units Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 167 8 1 3 System Check Before starting the survey you should check the equipment in the lab especially if the system was not used for a longer period of time Check system power Connect the electronic unit to a suitable power supply 110 240 V AC 50 60 Hz and switch the system on The power switch and the power control LEDs should flash Please note that the SES 2000 ROV pressure vessel has to be powered off for least 6 minutes before re powering because of the internal online USV Check receiver data transfer to SESWIN After booting WINDOWS and invoking the SESWIN software SESWIN echoprint area should scroll from right to left That is ruler lines appear and maybe noise is visible depending on gain settings If no ruler lines are visible check at Main Menu Options System Settings View Draw Lines and Draw Text in the Ruler section have to be ticked on picture below System Settings Ed Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scar System Synchronization Files n View Marker Map Beam steering Screen Background Ruler f white W Draw Lines C Grey C Black W Dra
296. the transducers where the water is less aerated and you have a wider weather window Transducer location Select a location as far away as possible from sources of noise For sub bottom profilers normally the ship s engine is the dominating noise source Prefer locations in the forward third of the vessel which normally will provide less aerated water less noise and less turbulence Heave will be lowest mid ship since no angular components are added Avoid locations near the ship s aft because of noise propeller and engine and aerated water Bulbous bow If the vessel has a pronounced bulbous bow be aware that it will trans port aerated water down Tunnel thrusters in the bow will also transport aerated water down in heavy seas Accordingly flush installations are more easily troubled by aerated water than blisters and gondolas that protrude from the hull Objects protruding from the hull Any objects protruding from the hull as well as holes and pipe outlets generate turbulence and flow noise Do not place the transducer in the vicinity of such objects and especially not close behind them For the same reason it is very important that the hull area around the transducer face is as smooth and level as possible Even traces of sealing compound sharp edges protruding bolts or boltholes without filling compound will create noise Portable mounting For portable mounting be aware of the need for a stiff connection between echo sounder tra
297. tings Several system parameters need setting up before the survey SES for Windows starts These parameters are accessible via the main menu Options System Settings This menu item is disabled once Program elem Help alg System Settings System Interfaces Quick Cc data logging has started Login at Startup i mi elt Network SES Client In older SESWIN versions these setting were to be found in EAE Options General Broadcast Server SIS Monitor MCP Monitor Screen dumps of all System Settings dialogs can be made by clicking the button in the lower right corner if this dialog Screen dumps are stored as bitmaps bmp at a user defined location This may be useful for documentation purposes see also section 7 18 on page 162 f 5 10 1 System Settings System EJ x system Settings Calculate speed of sound in water Parameter Muki Frequency Dual Range Side Scan System Synchronisation Files View Marker Map Beam Steering Temperature degrees Celsius 8 C Salinity parts of thousand 35 erin neers meme a Sound Velocity in Water Depth meter 1500 m 1500 mz S far eal x eh el tea Se ete a RS es Nast fd MRT feet Deal ey a ia ta Pt es Vat Rs par ety VBS bet Seal tt Sey at fees We Te a FR EI cI Vi IS CD NS Sn ME Sie Ginko ea n ne Sa nS Ar aS a a en Sg see a Signal Source HF Selection Speed of sound 1507
298. tion Make sure that the correct external power supply is connected to the system Use the green power switch es to power up the system Check the LED s for the internal voltages at the SES front panel all must be lit The operating system MS WINDOWS is booting automatically Start the system software SESWIN from the Desktop with the corresponding icon It takes a few seconds for the software to initialise all interfaces after that period new data will be received by the system For the SES 2000 medium and SES 2000 deep systems the extension unit should be switched on first Do not switch on both electronic units at the same time to prevent the inrush current to get to high 7 6 2 Shutdown Procedure Stop all Recording and Printing sessions via the RECORD Button and the PRINT Button and stop the transmitters via the TRANSMIT Button Shutdown the system software SESWIN via the EXIT Button or via the Menu Entry Program Exit Shut down the operating system MS WINDOWS via the Task Bar with the Button Start Shut Down When the WINDOWS operating system has finished this procedure by showing the Shutdown Screen use the green power switch es to switch off the power supply If the SES system is remote controlled via network using a remote PC running SESWIN in client mode see section 7 16 3 on page156 the server SESWIN on the SES system should be closed first before closing the SESWIN on the remote computer Innomar Technologie
299. tion but may be helpful to determine network errors 10004 Interrupted function call A blocking operation was interrupted 10013 Permission denied An attempt was made to access a socket in a way forbidden by its access permissions 10014 Bad address The system detected an invalid pointer address in attempting to use a pointer argument of a call This error occurs if an application passes an invalid pointer value or if the length of the buffer is too small 10022 Invalid argument Some invalid argument was supplied for example specifying an invalid level to the setsockopt function In some instances it also refers to the current state of the socket for instance calling accept on a socket that is not listening 10024 Too many open files Too many open sockets Each implementation may have a maximum number of socket handles available either globally per process or per thread 10035 Resource temporarily unavailable This error is returned from operations on nonblocking sockets that cannot be completed immediately for example recv when no data is queued to be read from the socket 10036 Operation now in progress A blocking operation is currently executing Windows Sockets only allows a single blocking operation per task or thread to be outstanding and if any other function call is made whether or not it references that or any other socket the function fails with this error 10037 Operation already in progres
300. tion is to enable or disable the transducer offset correction The correction is calculated online every time new position and heading values are received The original position data will be replaced by the new calculated ones Take care The system will use the heading information as specified by Heading Data Source If that data is incorrect or does not exist either incorrect position data will be stored or an error window will show up gt f offset correction is enabled the original position data will be overwritten Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 87 5 12 Network Settings Options The network functions can connect the SES General 2000 systems with other computers via TCP IP Login at Startup either for remote controlling the SES main unit or to receive GPS SIS data via network Depending on the network settings made in the SES Configuration tool see section 4 2 on page 47 the menu Main Menu Options contains different entries that are discussed in this Options section S15 Monitor MCP Monitor General Login 3 F SES Configuration SIS Monitor MEF Monitor Network Settings aay f No network operation Options C Network operation as Server General Login at Startup C Network operation as Chent Network SES Client STS GPS Heading via Network Pork Broadcast Server S15 Monitor MCPF Monitor supplied by a central server via TCP IP server rather tha
301. tion of the SES 2000 sub bottom profiler is given It is intended as short reference for both new and experienced SES operators References to the detailed descriptions in the other chapters are provided In the last section of this chapter on page 19 a checklist is provided that should be used during system installation and setup to make sure that all settings that are necessary to get good survey results are made 2 1 SES 2000 System Overview and System Installation For a wide range of applications and water depths there are different SES 2000 systems available This section gives a short overview The SES 2000 system components and the installation are described in detail in chapter 3 on page 21 The SES 2000 systems consists of the following components e Main system unit with the transmitters receivers amplifiers there is an extension unit for the SES 2000 medium and deep systems e External PC notebook for the SES 2000 compact system e Transducer array used to transmit and receive the signals e Workstation optional to remote control the system via network LAN Within the cabinet of the main unit there are the power supply transmitter units units for analogue and digital signal processing and an industrial personal computer The SES 2000 compact is shipped without an integrated PC but optionally with a notebook PC The operating system of the control PC is MS Windows XP SES 2000 compact e main unit e external PC e trans
302. to avoid interference with other acoustic systems Often it is required to operate several acoustic systems at the same time to increase the survey efficiency for instance collecting multi beam data and sub bottom data together To avoid any interference you should generally try to use different frequencies for the different acoustic systems If similar frequencies are used by the systems interferences may occur and affect the data quality obtained seriously Sometimes even acoustic systems using higher frequencies than the SES 2000 are affected due to the harmonics of the primary frequencies of the SES system that are generated within the water see section 9 4 on page 186 for details on the nonlinear sound generation used in these systems There are different strategies to avoid or reduce interferences e Place the transducers at different locations and make the distance as large as possible e Free run all systems i e without synchronizing them This results in uncorrelated inter ferences that may be removed by digital signal processing like stacking and median filters e Synchronize all systems to a fixed ping cycle and give each system a fixed time slot for pinging This results in determined interference that may not harm data quality or may be removed more easily than random interference A typical survey operation requires collecting multi beam data and sub bottom data at the same time If both systems are working in a similar freq
303. token 85 decimal 00 00 heave 0000h Od 0mm 7F 2A roll 7f2Ah 32554d 178 82 FF A1 pitch FFA1h 65441d 359 48 Innomar Technologie GmbH 238 SES 2000 User s Guide B3 47 yaw B347h 45895d 252 11 B3 45 heading B345h 45983d 252 10 FF AccMonD not used 8F LSB of checksum LSB 55h 00 00 07h FF 8Fh Conversion to degrees angle hex angle 180 2 15 Format MRU Standard Seatex Norway This format is a fixed MRU Normal format The binary format MRU standard consists of a fixed length message using single byte unsigned and 4 byte IEEE floating point data elements For the multi byte elements the most significant byte is transmitted first The serial port should be set to 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit baud rate according to SESWIN settings Example hexadecimal 71 11 2f 3d 50 e5 60 bd 50 e5 60 be 50 e5 60 3f 9d 3 b6 cb Field Bytes Format Unit Example Value Status 1 ASCII 71 q or Q Length 1 unsigned 11 33 bytes 0x11 Token 1 unsigned 2f 0 255 set to 47 0x2f Roll 4 float radian 3d 50 e5 60 0 051 rad Pitch 4 float radian bd 50 e5 60 0 051 rad Yaw 4 float radian be 50 e5 60 0 204 rad Heave 4 float meter 3f 9d f3 b6 1 234 m Checksum 1 unsigned cb 0 255 User Configurable Format TSS Great Britain The following sensors are applicable to the Parametric Echo Sounder SES 2000 if they support TSS s User Configurable Format CMS roll and pitch accu
304. tor The scrolling can be stopped with the STOP button The ON TOP button keeps the SIS monitor on top of the screen even if the main window of the SES for Windows application becomes active The slider can be used to select the visible part of long data strings the maximum visible string length is 512 bytes characters By pressing the Stream Data to File button the received data are written to an ASCII text file for test and trouble shooting purposes Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 93 5 14 File Tools Gere Options Help Some tools are available Wain Menu Program for the file management of the recorded SES data in file mode A file File Cutter browser is used for easier selection of recorded data to replay with the SES software A file cutter is used for the creation of data files with sub selections of areas of interest from bigger Exit data sets Capture Window Strg 5 14 1 File Browser There are two ways to load previously recorded data files The first one is to use the Open File button from the Button Bar which opens a standard MS Windows file open dialog The second more convenient method is to use the provided file browser with extended sorting and directory overview features The file browser is used in File Mode only and can be invoked via Main Menu Program File Browser Browser Directory Selector Name DAS ES Applications D ata Browse File Selectiorr D
305. ttings made in the System Interfaces SIS dialog SIS Monitor SES for Windows Options General Login at Startup Network MMEA Server Gener gt en MEE MCP Monitor STOP ON TOP Deter bitters Stor ON TOP Innomar Technologie GmbH 78 SES 2000 User s Guide COM Port serial interface Settings These parameters have to be set according to the SIS or GPS receiver is currently used Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity If these settings are disabled the system is set up to get the navigation data via TCP IP network connection see section 5 12 on page 87 Mode With Mode you can adept the navigation input of the SES 2000 system to the navi gation data format of the used GPS receiver NMEA compatible means that the incoming navigation data have a NMEA compatible format see appendix Space separated means that space characters separate the incoming data Absolute positions means that you have to define the absolute start positions character number and length of the substrings to be extracted see below String Extraction Within NMEA compatible mode up to four different NMEA sentences can be recognized by the SESWIN software The NMEA IDs to be recognized have to be set in the NMEA1 to NMEA4 boxes In this mode the required NMEA ID address for each substring to be extracted has to be defined If one of the incoming NMEA sentences has this ID address the settings for position offs
306. ucer connected to the main unit O O O Check if all connectors are fastened properly and all cables are fixed O For the SES 2000 ROV pressure vessel a pressure test has to be made 2 4 3 System power up O Make sure the transducer is below water level and covered by water all times Switch on main power power switch and all power LEDs are flashing Windows OS is booting and the Windows desktop shows up Now it s safe to connect additional sensors if postponed see above OO00 Invoke the SESWIN software If there are any error messages refer to section 8 2 on page 169 O The echoprint part of the SESWIN window starts scrolling from right to left If not check if System Mode is switched on F2 and the synchronisation mode is set to Internal SESWIN main menu Options System Settings System 2 4 4 SESWIN settings O Set transducer s draught in SESWIN main menu Options System Settings System Check incoming SIS navigation data Check incoming motion sensor data OOO Check all other settings in the Options System Settings and System Interfaces dialogs that may be important for your survey Innomar Technologie GmbH 20 SES 2000 User s Guide 2 4 5 System check preparing survey start Make sure the transducer is below water level and covered by water all times Switch on the transmitter F4 Switch to split view to display both data channels HF and NF F9 Set the range a
307. uency range interferences may cause wrong bottom detections in the multi beam data sets The SES 2000 data usually is not affec ted seriously by the MBES Since the SES 2000 systems use a very narrow sound beam in most cases only the centre nadir and near nadir MBES beams are affected To increase the signal to interference ratio and thus get better bottom detection for the MBES it is recommen ded to use the highest possible transmit energy the longest pulse length for the MBES If the systems are not synchronized the wrong MBES depth values are mostly at random depths and can be edited or post processed only with time consuming work To avoid random interferences and to put the spikes coming from the SES 2000 SBP toa certain depth level the MBES and the SES 2000 system should be synchronized For this either the SES 2000 or the MBES can be used as master to trigger the other system In deeper water the recommended solution is to run the SES 2000 SBP as master in Deep Sea Burst Pulse Mode see section 9 5 4 on page 191 and to trigger the MBES This is discussed in section 7 13 3 on page 144 Not all MBES can be triggered externally and in shallow water or low altitudes for ROV based operation it is also possible to have the MBES the master device and the SES system put to External Synchronisation to get good results with both systems This is discussed in section 7 13 2 on page 140 7 13 1 Synchronizing Triggering Gen
308. ufficient Wait for at least 60 seconds before restarting the system e lf that does not solve the problem delete the SES for Windows key in the registry and restart the system This procedure is described in section 4 1 on page 47 Innomar Technologie GmbH 172 SES 2000 User s Guide 8 4 No incoming data 8 4 1 No incoming echo data The echo data does not scroll from the right to the left side There may be different reasons e You might be in File Mode Go to System Mode F2 toggles both modes e The Synchronisation Mode is set to External without feeding an appropriate trigger signal to the Trigger In connector of the main unit e Atnew systems there is a LED next to the Trigger OUT connector that flashes every time a sync pulse is generated e The SES 2000 compact unit is not connected to the external PC or the COM ports are not set up properly e You could also check if there are data sent by the internal real time controller according to section 8 1 4 on page 168 8 4 2 No incoming data from Motion Sensor The motion sensor is connected to SES 2000 Motion Sensor connector but in the MS window heave roll pitch yaw and heading permanently show 0 0 Mo dataak Check the settings in the Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor tab sheet it takes some time for the motion sensor to stabilize So allow oi a some minutes for that process A
309. ulti Purpose COM Port see section 5 11 3 on page 81 The warning colour will be yellow if there is data coming in but is not recognised The colour will be red if there is no incoming data The SESWIN status bar is described in detail in section 5 7 on page 57 Innomar Technologie GmbH 18 SES 2000 User s Guide 2 3 4 Some more SESWIN Dialogs Network settings Main menu Options Network Network Server Mode Messages Client Mode Messages Network Settings Connections Network Settings Additional Options Local Fort 50096 Check to enable commands Local Pork 50096 jf not connected Local Server P 192 168 115 11 Server F 0 0 0 0 46 SES Server is not active 48 SES Client is not active 48 NAV Server is not active 48 NAY Client is not active ot SES SERVER s4 NET CLOSED j ef SES CLIENT s NET CLOSED NMEA Server The network functions can connect the SES 2000 systems with other computers via TCP IP a The SESWIN software has to be installed not only on the SES Local Port a001 system Server but also on the remote computer Client and you ServerlP 192 168 115 11 have to set the port addresses properly lt is also possible to receive SIS navigation data via TCP IP network connection For this purpose a NMEA server has to be set fy Open NMEA SERVER up properly ga CLOSE Network 48 NMEA Server is not active These settings are explained in section 5 12 on page 87 of this manual File
310. ustable optionally up to 800us transmission pulses CW Ricker Multi frequency Signals Transmitting channels 1 Electrical Pulse Power gt kW Transmitting Sensitivity gt 236 dB uPa re 1m Heave Compensation yes depending on valid motion sensor data Roll Pitch Compensation and not available tl Pulse Repetition Rate lt 30 s up to 50 s with High Pulse Rate Module Deep Sea Pulse Mode Deep Sea Burst viet Depth Range Penetration up to 40m depends on sediment frequency noise level Accuracy 100 kHz 0 02 m 0 02 of water depth 10 kHz 0 04m 0 02 of water depth at pulse length 0 1ms Trigger Input TTL max 12V low active SES 2000 as slave Data Record 2 channels primary frequency HF and secondary frequency LF both channels envelope data for the selected range Digitisation full waveform data 16 bit 96kHz envelope data 16 bit sample rate depending on selected range Innomar Technologie GmbH 210 SES 2000 User s Guide Signal Processing bandpass filters adjusted automatically according to transmission pulse characteristics noise reduction different filters and stacking smoothing DSP for improved resolution and penetration into sediment heave compensation and swell filter adjustable TVG on line view of processed echoprints replay of previously recorded files Data Output on line recording of envelope data for the selected range of both receiver channels system parameters an
311. ved gas as well as free gas bubbles strongly affects sub bottom profiling Due to decreased sound velocity increased backscatter as well as increased attenuation gassy sediments may prevent penetration acoustic blanking and or change the appearance of sub bottom structures basin effect For both sub bottom profiling in areas with gassy sediments as well as detection of gas flares a wide range of frequencies should be available It different frequencies are used it is maybe possible to penetrate the gassy sediment layer and the properties of the gassy sediments can be estimated In this case it is very convenient to use parametric sub bottom profilers since the footprint is independent of the frequency and therefore no correction for changes in geometry have to be applied Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 199 APPENDIX A 1 SES 2000 TranSCuce s ccccccccsececeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeesees 201 A 1 1 SES 2000 compact light standard Transducer cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 A 1 2 Transducer Mounting Bracket Option cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 202 A 1 3 SES 2000 medium TranSCucer sitsit 203 Al4 SES 2000 Geep TranSGucel scssi a e E T 205 ANo SES Z000cHO V Transducer a a 206 A 2 SES 2 000 Specat S hcne RACIE 207 A 2 1 SES 2000 compact Specifications ccccccccccccccesseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeesaaees 207 A
312. w Text Show Range in msec If the screen is not scrolling please check synchronisation settings trigger mode should be set to Internal in most cases see picture below For further tests see section 8 1 4 System Settings Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scar System 2 Synchronization Files View Marker Map Beam Steering Pee eee eee eee Mode f ntemal Trigger f External Trigger wade f Altermating Trigger Check command data transfer from SESWIN Changing the ping rate either by using the slider in the Range menu or increasing the range should affect the scrolling speed This indicates that commands are properly recognised by the SES system Check data recording printing Now you should test if data recording and printing works It should be possible to replay the recorded data as well Check additional sensors You should also check data transfer from external sensors GPS motion sensor Please refer to the regarding chapters of this manual for setup of these sensors Innomar Technologie GmbH 168 SES 2000 User s Guide If you have the necessary equipment you may also check some other hardware functions as shown below Please keep in mind that the transducers must not be operated in air e Check amplifiers and filters If your system is equipped with the optional Analogue Input you can supply a signal to this connector amplitude below 10V frequency e g 10kHz Plea
313. w this tick box Innomar Technologie GmbH 5 10 4 System Settings View System Settings x These settings only affect the Multi Frequency Dual Range Side Scan echoprints screen for online Systern Synchronisation Files i i i Marker Map Beam Steering data representation Screen Background White C Grey C Black W Draw Lines We Draw Text Show Range in mec Colour Table M Manual Setup f Rambow f Greyscale Signal window Peak Waterfall Fel W Transparent Ruler Text Slow W Transparent Marker Text Amplitude Curve Draw Amplitude Curve Cancel Screen Background Background colour for echo plot screen default white Colour Table Colours for data in echo plot screen For the online processing echoprints are calculated that show the signal strength or signal changes using different colours or different greyscale values Thresholds and linear logarithmic scaling are set in the parameter menu of the main screen Default Rainbow for SBP data and Greyscale for side scan data Signal Window Enable or disable the Peak Waterfall in the small Signal Window in the lower left part of the SESWIN screen The falling speed of the waterfall line is adjustable Amplitude Curve lf checked an amplitude curve will be overlaid onto the generated echo plots This averaged curve of the maximum amplitude within the received echo signals may be used as an indication about changes on the properties of the seab
314. which channel is displayed to the right side The channel displayed to the right side is the one that will be printed These signal processing options are explained in section 9 6 2 on page 193 To exit the program the correct sequence should be Stop printer F6 Stop Record F5 Stop transmitter F4 Exit Program ALT F4 A more detailed description of the SESWIN button bar is given in section 5 3 on page 53 Innomar Technologie GmbH SES 2000 User s Guide 17 2 3 2 Monitoring Windows There are four windows displaying different data e SIS displays the first 6 of 8 values imported on the navigation string as defined on Options System Interfaces SIS e MS displays data received from a motion sensor Motion sensor data import is defined on Options System Interfaces Motion Sensor e SIG displays the envelope of the received echo signal This window can be used to adjust the amplifier settings e MAP displays a map with track information and optionally defined profile lines and target positions SIS SIS1 S83 737 993 Heave 5cm gS 10172 830 Fall 1 37 SIS3 179 946 Pitch 0 17 SlS4 111738 Yaw 143 8 SSS 42 Heading 143 9 SIS 5 The SESWIN monitoring windows are described in detail in section 5 6 on page 56 2 3 3 Status Bar Range 2m fm LF Freq 10kHz LF Pulses 2 Protile 1 14 04 2001 16 42 37 oe PRN o k But 0 Page 0 HE 2031ME e MS no data SIS no data Ca
315. wse File Selector 0801 20071 42026 ses 05 01 2007 1420 27 14 33 15 kuhlungsborn Ta 2400 34488 Kuhlungsborr 0801 2007152400 ses 08 01 2007 15 24 00 15 32 01 E uhlungsborn 0801 20071 80045 ses 08 01 2007 18 00 45 18 17 53 34486 Euhlungsborn File Cut ea From Pos i E al To Pos apa Te Cut Load Cancel Directory Selection After selecting a directory Browse the browser searches for SES data files ses File Selection The files are sorted by name and some additional information recording date time file size profile number and area is given for each file The selected file is highlighted and a preview is shown in the File Cut section File Cut The selected file is shown as a graphical preview The LF channel of the SES data is processed to display a small echo plot with an adjustable zoom rate Vertical time marks are plotted onto the preview window The user may select a start and a stop position for the area of interest within the data file by pressing the related button and then using the mouse It is also possible to set the start and end trace numbers manually The part of the data that will be extracted into a new file remains with normal colours The false coloured parts are cut Please note that the zoom level affects trace numbers shown Cut After pushing the Cut button a dialog asks for a new file name and the sub selection of the data file will be stored in a new file Th
316. y Mode Multi Frequency Mode y Beam Steering Mode La Allow High Pulse Rate a ete oer Deep Sea Pulse Mode 7 it Siete cee oe age 2 T ANE a a ree ie nee sae oe pe ice i fe eee a ae ee he Poe Monitoring Windows 2 _ __ _ 1EM Range 125m 150m ILF Freg 6kH2 LF Fulzes 2 Frofile 1 Status Bar MIS 2007 11 23 38 EKT PRN no paper Buf O Page 0 E HD 5447MEB MS nodaa SIS no data MCF no data Echo plot display Online output of calculated echogram Scrolling speed depends on the range settings the resulting ping rate and process parameters Depth display Display of water depth measured by HF channel Monitoring SIS Display of navigation data Windows MS Display of motion sensor data Signal Display of echo envelope MAP Display of track plot Level display Depth ruler Parameter menu Status bar Main menu pull down menus Button bar Hotkeys Displays signal amplitude of LF and HF channel A depth scale is displayed The depth values are calculated based on a given constant sound velocity Setting of hardware parameters e g choosing frequency and pulse length setting the amplifiers Display of essential system settings and status display for the system System configuration interface configuration help Setting of most important features for system mode e g switching on off transmitting data recording printing Innomar Technologie GmbH 16 SES 2000 User s Gui
317. you can assign the shared folder to a drive letter on your notebook e Open an command window Start gt Run gt type cmd e Type net use 192 168 115 11 Ses_Data in the command window e Now you should get the message that the remote folder is assigned to a drive letter The new drive is now also visible in computer and you should be able to access the data files This procedure is also described at http www microsoft com windowsxp using networking expert russel_hni mspx Innomar Technologie GmbH 162 SES 2000 User s Guide 7 18 How to use SESWIN s documentation and report tools There are several tools available within SESWIN that may be used to document system settings creating profile lists and for troubleshooting 7 18 1 Document SESWIN system and interface settings There is a button placed in the lower right corner of both the System Settings and Interface Settings windows cancel Pressing this button will generate screenshots of all tabs within the window not only the visible one File names are set automatically from the window and tab name as well as the date see figure below Folder can be changed default is set to the SESWIN folder Save fis Save Ir gt SES WIN_O50109_RO VO4D ki fl ee El Ll Recent 3 SESWIN SystemSettings 20090108 Beam Steerng ee SESWIN SystemSettings 20090108 Dual Range SESWIHN_Sypystem5ettings _20090108_Files ET SESWIN S
318. ystemSettings_ 20090108_Map Documents SESWIN SystemSettings 20090108 Marker ME SESWIN SystemSettings _20090108_Multi Frequency ead SESWIN SystemSettings 20090108 System i SESWIN SystemSettings 20090108 View Network File name SESW N_SystemSettings 20090108 hi Bitmap bmp Cancel Using this feature you need just two clicks to document all system settings for future reference The SES system and SESWIN versions and options available can be obtained and saved as well using the System Information window see section 7 18 3 on page 163 Save as type 7 18 2 Log files for work reports profile lists It is possible to automatically log all data records within a log file called sesrec log that is placed within the SESWIN folder The generated log file will show the file name incl path and date time profile number area SIS values transmitter and range parameters for both start SOL and end EOL of line record This is shown in the screen shot below Ci SES_Applications Data 2 6681221263621 ses SOL 21 12 2068 26 36 21 Profile 1 Area SIS 42609 45 7862352 64 21 12 2008 26 36 21 6 30615 369 18 6 48 8 62 SET 15kH2 1pulses R tart 14m RLength 15m EOL 21 12 2008 26 56 58 Profile 1 Area SIS 42751 24 7862269 42 21 12 2008 26 56 58 6 14174 389 52 8 67 1 07 SET 15kH2 1pulses RStart 14m RLength 15m C SE8_ Applications Data 2 6081221205304 ses SOL 21 12 2008 26 53 04 Profile 1 Area SIS 42756 71

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Istruzione d`uso  LOSS PREVENTION SERVICE REQUEST - LPSR  Qualité Environnementale des bâtiments en Languedoc  DLO TransDock Direct User's Manual  Bosch Power Tools F 012 286 000 2860 User's Manual  Jarratt Hall (PDF-1MB) - University of Birmingham  MANUAL DEL OPERADOR  Samsung T528 Manual  rules for Wiz-War - Fantasy Flight Games  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file